Contents A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17

MINI Owner's Manual for the vehicle Thank you for choosing a MINI. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 © 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID4 X/17, 11 17 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Contents

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ MOBILITY ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 198 Refueling page 262. 200 Fuel The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and 202 Wheels and tires Communication can be called up via the follow‐ 223 Engine compartment ing Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's 225 Engine oil Manual in the vehicle, Online Owner's Manual, 229 Coolant MINI Driver's Guide app. 231 Maintenance 233 Replacing components 6 Information 244 Breakdown assistance 250 Care AT A GLANCE 16 Cockpit REFERENCE 20 Central Information Display (CID) 256 Technical data 28 Voice activation system 260 Appendix 31 Owner's Manual media 262 Everything from A to Z

CONTROLS 38 Opening and closing 55 Settings 64 Transporting children safely 69 Driving 91 Displays 109 Lights 115 Safety 134 Driving stability control systems 139 Driving comfort 157 Climate control 165 Interior equipment 172 Storage compartments 175 Cargo area

DRIVING TIPS 184 Things to remember when driving 189 Saving fuel

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 6

Information

Information

Using this Owner's Additional sources of in‐ Manual formation

Orientation Dealer’s service center The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer ular topic is by using the index. questions at any time. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter. Internet The Owner's Manual and general Information Updates made after the editorial about MINI, for example on technology, are deadline available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com. Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐ ferences may exist between the printed Own‐ Integrated Owner's Manual in the er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐ vehicle uals: The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐ ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. scribes features and functions found in the ve‐ hicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ▷ Online Owner's Manual. displayed on the Control Display. Additional in‐ ▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App. formation, refer to page 31. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. MINI Motorer’s Guide app The app specifically describes features and Owner's Manual for Navigation, functions found in the vehicle. The app can be Entertainment, Communication displayed on smartphones and tablets. Addi‐ The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ tional information, refer to page 33. ment, and Communication can be obtained as printed book from the service center. Online Owner's Manual The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐ Communication can be called up via the follow‐ scribes features and functions found in the ve‐ ing Owner's Manuals: hicle. The Online Owner's Manual can be dis‐ ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. played in any of today's browsers. Additional information, refer to page 33. ▷ Online Owner's Manual. ▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 7

Information

Symbols and displays Vehicle features and op‐ tions Symbols in the Owner's Manual This Owner's Manual describes all models and Symbol Meaning all standard, country-specific and optional Precautions that must be followed. To equipment that is offered in the model series. avoid the possibility of personal injury Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and serious damage to the vehicle. and illustrates features and functions that are not available in your vehicle, for example be‐ ◄ End of a specific item of information. cause of the selected optional features or the country-specific version. Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. "..." Control Display texts used to select When using these functions and systems, the individual functions. applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the served. voice activation system.. For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐ ››...‹‹ Answers generated by the voice mentary Owner's Manuals. activation system. Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have about the Action steps features and options applicable to your vehicle. Action steps to be carried out are presented as numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order. Status of the Owner's 1. First action step. Manual 2. Second action step. Basic information Enumerations The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐ policy of constant development that is con‐ ternative possibilities are presented as list with ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to bullet points. embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ ▷ First possibility. dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from ▷ Second possibility. those in your vehicle. Symbols on vehicle components Updates made after the editorial Refers to the relevant section of this deadline Owner's Manual for further information on a Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐ particular part or assembly. ferences may exist between the printed Own‐ er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐ uals: ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 8

Information

▷ Online Owner's Manual. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends ▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App. that you entrust corresponding procedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If you choose to Notes on updates can be found in the appendix use another service facility, the manufacturer of of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. your vehicle recommends use of a facility that performs work, for instance maintenance and repair, according to MINI specifications with For Your Own Safety properly trained personnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another qualified service Manufacturer center or repair shop". The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische If work is performed improperly, for instance Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG. maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐ sequent damage and related safety risks. Intended use Follow the following when using the vehicle: Parts and accessories ▷ Owner's Manual. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of parts and accessory products ap‐ ▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove proved by the manufacturer of the MINI. stickers. Approved parts and accessories, and advice on ▷ Technical vehicle data. their use and installation are available from a ▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where MINI dealer's service center. the vehicle is driven. MINI parts and accessories were tested by the ▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐ manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and ments. suitability in MINI vehicles.

Warranty The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen‐ uine MINI parts and accessories. Your vehicle is technically configured for the The manufacturer of your vehicle does not operating conditions and registration require‐ evaluate whether each individual product from ments applying in the country of first delivery, another manufacturer can be used with MINI also known as homologation. If your vehicle is vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, to be operated in a different country it might even if a country-specific official approval was be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten‐ issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does tially differing operating conditions and regis‐ not evaluate whether these products are suita‐ tration requirements. If your vehicle does not ble for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions. comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further California Proposition 65 Warning information on warranty is available from a California laws require us to state the following dealer’s service center. warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ Maintenance and repairs bile components and parts, including compo‐ Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ materials and high-performance electronics, cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the requires suitable maintenance and repair work. State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐ fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 9

Information

tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain Maintenance products of component wear contain or emit Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the chemicals known to the State of California to road safety, operational reliability and the New cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ Vehicle Limited Warranty. ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ ures: pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused ▷ MINI Maintenance system. cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and for US models. water. ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Service and warranty If the vehicle is not maintained according to We recommend that you read this publication these specifications, this could result in serious thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not lowing warranties: covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐ ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ranty. ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. Data memory ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. ▷ California Emission Control System Limited General information Warranty. Electronic control devices are installed in the Detailed information about these warranties is vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the ve‐ listed in the Service and Warranty Information hicle to function safely or provide assistance Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and during driving, for instance driver assistance Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. systems. Furthermore, control devices facilitate Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and comfort or infotainment functions. designed to meet the particular operating con‐ Electronic control devices contain data memo‐ ditions and homologation requirements in your ries, which are able to temporarily or perma‐ country and continental region in order to de‐ nently store information about the condition of liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is the vehicle, component load, maintenance re‐ operated under those conditions. If you wish to quirements, technical events or faults. operate your vehicle in another country or re‐ This information generally records the state of a gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐ component, a module, a system or the environ‐ cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐ ment, for instance: ditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable war‐ ▷ Operating states of system components, ranty limitations or exclusions for such country e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐ or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐ tery status. tomer Relations for further information. ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational speed, wheel speed, deceleration, trans‐ verse acceleration, engaged safety belt in‐ dicator.

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 10

Information

▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system hicle by means of the service history and trans‐ components, for instance lights and brakes. ferred to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events. owner can contact a dealer's service center to object to the data being stored and transferred ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ to the vehicle manufacturer. This objection ap‐ tions such as airbag deployment or en‐ plies for as long as the vehicle owner remains gagement of the stability control systems. the proprietor of the vehicle. ▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals. Data entry and data transfer into the The data is required to perform the control de‐ vehicle vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps General information the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle Depending on the vehicle equipment, some functions. The majority of this data is transient data can be transferred into the vehicle when and is only processed within the vehicle itself. using comfort and infotainment functions, Only a small proportion of the data is stored in for instance: event or fault memories and, if needed, in the ▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or vehicle key. photos for playback in an integrated multi‐ media system. Reading out data ▷ Address book data for use in conjunction When servicing, for instance during repairs, with an integrated hands-free system or an service processes, warranty cases, and quality integrated navigation system. assurance measures, this technical information can be read out from the vehicle together with ▷ Entered navigation destinations. the vehicle identification number. A dealer’s ▷ Data on the use of Internet services. service center or another qualified service cen‐ This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or ter or repair shop can read out the information. is found on a device that has been connected The socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis re‐ to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, the data. The data is collected, processed, and it can be deleted at any time. This data is only used by the relevant organizations in the serv‐ transmitted to third parties if expressly desired. ice network. The data documents the technical This depends on the personal settings selected conditions of the vehicle, helps in locating for using online services. faults and improving quality, and is transferred Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐ to the vehicle manufacturer, if needed. lowing comfort and individual settings can be Furthermore, the manufacturer has product stored in the vehicle and modified at any time, monitoring duties to meet in line with product for instance: liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle ▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel po‐ manufacturer needs technical data from the sitions. vehicle. Fault and event memories in the vehi‐ cle can be reset when a dealer’s service center ▷ Suspension and climate control settings. or another qualified service center or repair ▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in shop performs repair or servicing work. the car's interior. Data on the scope of servicing work performed and maintenance records are stored in the ve‐

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 11

Information

Control via mobile devices there too. Personal data may be used to per‐ Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile form online services. Data is exchanged over a devices connected to the vehicle, for instance secure connection, for instance with the IT sys‐ smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle tems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for control elements. The sound and picture from this purpose. Any collection, processing, and the mobile device can be played back and dis‐ use of personal data above and beyond that played through the multimedia system. Certain needed to provide the services must always be information is transferred to the mobile device based on a legal permission, contractual ar‐ at the same time. Depending on the type of rangement or consent. connection, this includes, for instance position In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates data and other general vehicle information. anonymized information on transport infra‐ This optimizes the way in which selected apps, structure and how the infotainment system is for instance navigation or music playback, used. This information cannot be traced back to work. individual vehicles or people. Evaluating the There is no further interaction between the mo‐ data enables the manufacturer to further im‐ bile device and the vehicle, for instance active prove its products or services, for instance by access to vehicle data. How the data will be incorporating the most up-to-date traffic bulle‐ processed further is determined by the provider tins. The data transfer feature can be deacti‐ of the particular app being used. The extent of vated in the vehicle. Certain services and func‐ the possible settings depends on the respective tions, some of which are subject to a charge, app and the operating system of the mobile can be deactivated by the driver. It is also pos‐ device. sible to activate or deactivate the data connec‐ tion as a whole. That is, with the exception of Services functions and services required by law such as Assist systems. General information Services from other providers If the vehicle has a wireless network connec‐ tion, this enables data to be exchanged be‐ When using online services from other provid‐ tween the vehicle and other systems. The wire‐ ers, these services are the responsibility of the less network connection is realized via an in- relevant provider and subject to their data pri‐ vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle personal mobile devices brought into the vehi‐ manufacturer has no influence on the content cle, for instance smartphones. This wireless net‐ exchanged during this process. Information on work connection enables 'online functions' to the way in which personal data is collected and be used. These include online services and apps used in relation to services from third parties, supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be other providers. obtained from the relevant service provider.

Services from the vehicle manufacturer Where online services from the vehicle manu‐ Event Data Recorder EDR facturer are concerned, the corresponding This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ functions are described in the appropriate corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to place, for instance the Owner's Manual or man‐ record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ ufacturer's website. The relevant legal informa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting tion pertaining to data protection is provided a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐

11 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 12

Information

standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. Vehicle identification The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short number period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were operating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. The vehicle identification number can be found ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. in the engine compartment, on the right-hand This data can help provide a better understand‐ side of the vehicle. ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐ corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐ tions and no personal data, for instance name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ quired during a crash investigation. The vehicle identification number can be found on the type label, on the right-hand side of the To read data recorded by an EDR, special vehicle. equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 13

Information

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐ rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐ rcar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17

WATCH ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 16

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

Cockpit

Vehicle features and op‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This tions also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- tems. When using these functions and systems, specific and optional features offered with the the applicable laws and regulations must be series. It also describes features that are not observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 50 Lights off 2 Exterior mirror operation 61 Daytime running lights 111 3 Buttons of the central locking system 42 Parking lights 109 4 Lights

Front fog lights 112 Low beams 109

Rear fog light 112

Light switch 109

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 17

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

Automatic headlight control 110 Roadside parking lights 110 Cornering light 111 High-beam Assistant 111 Onboard Computer 100 Instrument lighting 113

7 Instrument cluster 91 5 Steering wheel buttons, left 8 Steering column stalk, right Camera-based cruise control on/ Windshield wipers 78 off 139

Cruise control on/off 144 Rain sensor 79

Cruise control: store speed Cleaning windows 76

Pausing, continuing cruise control Rear window wiper 77

Cruise control: increase speed Clean the rear window 77

Cruise control: reduce speed 9 Steering wheel buttons, right Voice activation 28 Camera-based cruise control: re‐ duce distance Telephone Camera-based cruise control: in‐ crease distance Confirm the selection 100 6 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal 74 Move selection up 100

High beams, head‐ Move selection down 100 light flasher 74

High-beam Assistant 111 Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 18

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

11 Adjust the steering wheel 63 12 Unlock hood 223

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 244 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 69

Intelligent Safety 125 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 134

2 Control Display 20 MINI Driving Modes switch 136 3 Radio/Multimedia 4 Glove compartment 172 7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 83 5 Climate control 157 Manual transmission selector lever 82 6 PDC Park Distance Control 146 8 Controller with buttons 21 Rearview camera 149 9 Parking brake 74 Parking assistant 152 Auto Start/Stop function 71

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 19

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request, SOS 4 Ambient light 113

2 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐ 5 Panoramic glass sunroof 52 ger airbag 118

3 Reading lights 113 6 Interior lights 113

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 20

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and op‐ Overview of control ele‐ tions ments This chapter describes all standard, country- Control elements specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept 1 Control Display The Central Information Display (CID) combines 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on the functions of a multitude of switches. Thus, the equipment version, with touchpad these functions can be operated from a central location. Control Display

General information Safety information To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐ structions, refer to page 253. WARNING In the case of very high temperatures on the Operating the integrated information sys‐ Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐ tems and communication devices while driving lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐ control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci‐ perature is reduced, for instance through shade dent. Only use the systems or devices when the or air conditioning, the normal functions are re‐ traffic situation allows. If necessary, stop and stored. use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.◀ Safety information NOTE Objects in the area in the front of the Control Display can shift and damage the Con‐ trol Display. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.◀

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 21

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Switching on 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the Controller.

Switching off

1. Press button. 2. "Turn off control display" ▷ Move in four directions.

Controller with navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ Buttons on the Controller rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. Button Function Some functions of the Central Information Dis‐ MENU Opens the main menu. play (CID) can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 23: RADIO Opens the Radio menu. ▷ Turn. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Phone menu.

BACK Displays the previous display.

OPTION Open the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ ▷ Press. rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. ▷ Turn.

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 22

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Operating concept

Opening the main menu Press button.

▷ Press.

The main menu is displayed. All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

▷ Move in two directions. Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected. 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function 2. Press the Controller. MENU Opens the main menu. AUDIO Open audio menu last listened to, Menu items in the Owner's Manual switch between audio menus. In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be TEL Opens the Phone menu. selected are set in quotation marks, for in‐ stance "Settings". BACK Open the previous display. Changing between displays OPTION Open the Options menu. After a menu item is selected, for instance "Radio", a new display appears. Displays can overlap.

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 23

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

▷ Move the Controller to the left. ▷ Control options for the selected main Closes the current display and shows the menu, for instance for "Radio". previous display. ▷ If applicable, further operating options for Reopens previous display by pressing BACK the selected menu, for instance "Store button. In this case, the current display is station". not closed. Changing settings ▷ Move the Controller to the right. 1. Select a field. Opens a new display on top of the previous screen. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is displayed.

Arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional displays can be opened. 3. Press the Controller.

Opening the Options menu Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ Press button. box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐ tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the The "Options" menu is displayed. menu item activates or deactivates the func‐ tion. Function is activated. Function is deactivated.

Touchpad Some functions of the Central Information Dis‐ play (CID) can be operated using the touchpad Additional options: move the Controller to the on the Controller: right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. Selecting functions 1. "Settings" Options menu 2. "Touchpad" The "Options" menu consists of various areas: 3. Select the desired function. ▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen". ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 24

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

▷ "Interactive map": use the interactive Changing settings map. You can use the touchpad to change Control ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered Display settings, for instance volume. Swipe left letters and numbers. or right to do this.

Entering letters and numbers Entering letters requires some practice at the Example: setting the beginning. When entering, pay attention to the clock following: ▷ The system distinguishes between upper Setting the clock and lower-case letters and numbers. To make entries, it may be necessary to 1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐ change between upper and lower-case let‐ played. ters, numbers and characters, refer to 2. Turn the Controller until "Settings" is page 27. highlighted, and then press the Controller. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display. ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. The set language deter‐ mines what input is possible. Where neces‐ sary, enter special characters via the Con‐ troller. ▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on the touchpad. 3. If necessary, move the Controller to the left ▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right in to display "Time/Date". the center of the touchpad. 4. Turn the Controller until "Time/Date" is ▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the highlighted, and then press the Controller. upper area of the touchpad. 5. Turn the Controller until "Time:" is high‐ ▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right lighted, and then press the Controller. in the lower area of the touchpad.

Operating the interactive map The interactive map in the navigation system can be moved via the touchpad.

Function Operation Interactive map. Swipe into respective di‐ rection.

Enlarge/shrink in‐ Drag in or out on the teractive map. touchpad with fingers.

Display menu. Tap once.

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 25

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

6. Turn the Controller to set the hours, and Symbol Meaning then press the Controller. Check the SIM card. 7. Turn the Controller to set the minutes, and then press the Controller. SIM card is blocked. SIM card is missing. Status information Enter PIN.

Status field Entertainment symbols The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: Symbol Meaning ▷ Time. Music collection. ▷ Current entertainment source. Gracenote® database. ▷ Sound output, on/off. AUX-IN port. ▷ Signal strength of cellular network. USB audio interface. ▷ Phone status. ▷ Traffic bulletin reception. Additional symbols Status field symbols Symbol Meaning The symbols are grouped as follows: Spoken instructions are switched off. Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning Split screen HD Radio station is being received. General information Satellite radio is switched on. Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, for instance infor‐ Telephone symbols mation from the Onboard Computer.

Symbol Meaning In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even Incoming or outgoing call. when switching to another menu. Missed call. Switching the split screen on/off Signal strength of cellular network. On the Control Display: Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available. 1. Press button. 2. "Split screen" Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 26

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Selecting the display Running a function On the Control Display: Press button. The function will work immediately. 1. Press button. This means, for instance that the number is di‐ 2. "Split screen" aled when a phone number is selected. 3. Move the Controller until the split screen is selected. Displaying the key assignment 4. Press the Controller or select "Split screen Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves content". or use objects. 5. Select the desired menu item. The button assignment is displayed at the top edge of screen.

Programmable memory Deleting the button assignments buttons 1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds. General information 2. "OK" The Central Information Display (CID) functions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for instance Deleting personal data radio stations, navigation destinations, phone in the vehicle numbers and menu entries. Settings are stored for the profile currently Concept used. Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations. Storing a function This personal data can be permanently deleted 1. Highlight function via the Central Informa‐ via the Central Information Display (CID). tion Display (CID). General information 2. Press and hold the desired button, Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐ until a signal sounds. lowing data is deleted: ▷ Personal Profile settings. ▷ Stored radio stations.

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 27

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

▷ Stored programmable memory buttons. Switching between upper/lower case, ▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information. numbers and characters ▷ Music collection. Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering upper and lower case letters ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐ and numbers: tions. Symbol Function ▷ Phone book. ▷ Voice notes. Enter the letters. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up Enter the numbers. to 30 minutes. or Tip the Controller up. Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary. Without navigation system Select the symbol. Deleting data Heed and follow the instructions on the Control Entry comparison Display. When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐ 1. Switch on the ignition. tered and letters may be added automatically. 2. "Settings" Entries are continuously compared with data 3. Open "Options". stored in the vehicle. 4. "Delete all personal data" ▷ Only those letters are offered during entry 5. "Continue" for which data is available. 6. "OK" ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐ tered in all languages that are available on the Control Display. Entering letters and numbers

General information 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐ bers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers, if needed. 3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function Press the Controller: delete letters or number.

Press the Controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 28

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

Voice activation system

Vehicle features and op‐ Functional requirements tions Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system This chapter describes all standard, country- so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ specific and optional features offered with the fied. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due To set the language, refer to page 104. to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, Using the voice activa‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be tion system observed. Activating the voice activation system

Concept 1. Press button on the steering wheel. Most functions displayed on the Control Display 2. Wait for the signal. can be operated by voice commands via the 3. Say the command. voice activation system. The system supports A command that is recognized by the voice you with announcements during input. activation system is announced and dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. General information This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ cates that the voice activation system is active. ▷ Functions that can only be used when the If no other commands are available, operate vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the the function via the Central Information Display voice activation system. (CID). ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. Terminating the voice activation ▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal system instructions to use with the voice activation Press the button on the steering wheel system. or ›Cancel‹. ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. Possible commands ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. General information Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands.

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 29

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

The available commands depend on the menu Example: opening the that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. tone settings There are short commands for many functions. Via the main menu You may select list entries such as phone list The commands of the menu items are spoken entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐ just as they are selected via the Controller. tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the respective list. 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if needed. Having possible commands read aloud You can have available commands read out 2. Press button on the steering wheel. loud for you: ›Voice commands‹ 3. ›Radio‹ E.g., if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the 4. ›Tone‹ commands for the settings are read out loud. Via short command Executing functions using short The desired tone settings can also be started commands via a short command. Execute functions on the main menu via short commands. It almost doesn't matter which 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, menu item is selected, for instance ›Vehicle if needed. status‹. 2. Press button on the steering wheel. The list for short commands of the voice activa‐ tion system can be called up via the Integrated 3. ›Tone‹ Owner's Manual on the Control Display.

Help dialog for the voice activation Setting the voice dialog system You can set the system to use standard dialog Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ or a short version. Additional commands for the help dialog: The short version of the voice dialog plays back ▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐ short messages in abbreviated form. tion about the current operating options 1. "Settings" and the most important commands for them. 2. "Language/Units" ▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: announces in‐ 3. "Speech type:" formation about the principle of operation 4. Select setting. for the voice activation system.

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐ structions until the desired volume is set. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

29 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 30

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐ rently used.

Information on Emer‐ gency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a phone connection.

Environmental condi‐ tions ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐ roof closed to prevent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 31

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and op‐ General information tions The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment, and Communication can be obtained as This chapter describes all standard, country- printed book from the service center. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Supplementary Owner's Manuals necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Also follow the instructions of the Supplemen‐ to the selected options or country versions. This tary Owner's Manuals, which are included in also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ addition to the onboard literature. tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle General information Concept You can use various media formats to call up The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐ the content in the Owner's Manual. The follow‐ scribes features and functions found in the ve‐ ing Owner's Manual media formats are availa‐ hicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ble: displayed on the Control Display. ▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 31. ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, Selecting the Owner's Manual refer to page 31. 1. Press button. ▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App, refer to page 33. 2. Turn the Controller: open "Vehicle info". ▷ Online Owner's Manual, refer to page 33. 3. Press the Controller. There are different features, refer to page 34, in each of the different media formats. 4. Select the required method of accessing the contents: ▷ "Quick reference" Printed Owner's Manual ▷ "Search by pictures"

Concept The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard, country-specific, and optional fea‐ tures offered with the series.

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 32

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media

▷ "Owner's Manual" 2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To switch from a function, for instance radio, to Leafing through the Owner's Manual the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays: Page by page with link access Turn the Controller until the next or previous 1. Press button or move the Controller to page is displayed. the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. Page by page without link access 2. "Display Owner's Manual" Scroll through the pages directly while skipping 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's the links. Manual. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the Controller to browse from page to page. 4. Press button again to return to last Scroll back. displayed function.

5. Press button to return to the page of Scroll forward. the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate continuously between the last dis‐ played function and the last displayed page of Context help the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time. General information Programmable memory buttons The section of the Owner's Manual relating to the function that is currently selected can be General information displayed directly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ Opening via Central Information grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Display (CID) rectly. Change directly to the Options menu from the Storing function on the Control Display: 1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the Central In‐ formation Display (CID). 1. Press button or move the Controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 33

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

2. Press and hold the desired button, Online Owner's Manual until a signal sounds. Concept Executing The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐ scribes features and functions found in the ve‐ Press button. hicle. The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ The Online Owner's Manual can be displayed in mediately. any of today's browsers.

General information MINI Motorer’s Guide app The Online Owner's Manual is available in many countries. An account on the customer Concept portal may be required. The app specifically describes features and Entering the vehicle identification number fil‐ functions found in the vehicle. ters the contents. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets. Vehicles It is possible to store several individual Owner's General information Manuals for various vehicles. The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐ tries as an app for iOS or Android in the respec‐ Language tive Store. The language is based on whichever language Entering the vehicle identification number fil‐ is set in the operating system. ters the contents. Printing Vehicles You can use the print function for automatically It is possible to store Owner's Manuals for vari‐ formatting and printing out individual chapters. ous vehicles in the app. It is also possible to test the app using a dem‐ onstration vehicle. Media components

Operating systems and language General information The app is available for the iOS and Android op‐ The following components are not available to erating systems. the same extent in all media formats. The Owner's Manual is downloaded in the lan‐ Additional information on availability, refer to guage of the device. page 34.

Quick Reference Guide The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐ tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use basic vehicle functions and what to do in case of a breakdown.

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 34

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media

Search by illustrations Videos Based on illustrations, image search provides The videos explain the main functions of the information and descriptions. This is helpful systems. when the terminology for a feature is not at hand. Smart Scan You can use Smart Scan to scan various sym‐ Frequently asked questions bols in the vehicle. After a brief explanation of This chapter provides answers to frequently the symbol in question appears, it is then possi‐ asked questions about your vehicle and helpful ble to display the chapter directly. links to additional information. Smart Scan is only available for the iOS operat‐ ing system. Quick links The chapter on quick links explains the most Keyword search important information and operating instruc‐ You can use keywords to search for information tions on the basis of various situations. and descriptions in the media.

Key features

Printed Integrated APP Online All equipment included. X — — —

Equipment included in vehicle. — X X X

Quick Reference Guide. — X X X

Search by illustrations. — X X X

Frequently asked questions. — — X X

Quick links. — — X X

Videos. — X X X

Smart Scan. — — X —

Keyword search. X X X X

X: included. —: not included.

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 35

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17

HANDLE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 38

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and op‐ WARNING tions Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. This chapter describes all standard, country- Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ specific and optional features offered with the cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ series. It also describes features that are not tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due the vehicle from the outside when there are to the selected options or country versions. This people in it.◀ also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, WARNING the applicable laws and regulations must be Unattended children or animals can observed. cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐ lowing actions: Remote control ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. General information ▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows. The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ trols with integrated key. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. Each remote control contains a replaceable ▷ Using vehicle equipment. battery. Replacing the battery, refer to There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not page 40. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ You may set the key functions depending on hicle. Take the remote control with you when the optional features and country-specific ver‐ exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ sion. Settings, refer to page 48. The vehicle stores personal settings for every Overview remote control. Personal Profile, refer to page 46. The remote controls hold information about re‐ quired maintenance. Service data in the remote control, refer to page 231.

Safety information WARNING People or animals in the vehicle can lock 1 Unlocking the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened 2 Locking from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take 3 Unlocking the tailgate the remote control with you so that the vehicle 4 Panic mode can be opened from the outside.◀

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 39

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Unlocking The alarm system, refer to page 49, is switched on. Press button on the remote control.

3. Press and hold this button on the Depending on the settings, refer to page 48, remote control in the area close to the ve‐ the following access points are unlocked. hicle after locking. ▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap. The exterior mirrors are folded in. Press the button of the remote control If the engine or ignition is still switched on again to unlock the other vehicle access when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn points. honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition ▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. must be switched off by means of the Start/ In addition, the following functions are exe‐ Stop button. cuted: ▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐ With Comfort Access: convenient fer to page 46, are applied. closing ▷ The interior lights and courtesy lights are Safety information switched on. WARNING These functions are not available if the inte‐ rior lights were switched off manually. With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure ▷ The welcome lights are switched on, if this that the area of movement of the doors is clear function was activated. during convenient closing.◀ ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 49, is switched off. Closing The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness. Press and hold this button on the re‐ mote control in the area close to the Convenient opening vehicle. Press and hold this button on the re‐ The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, mote control after unlocking. as long as the button on the remote control is pressed. The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, The exterior mirrors are folded in. as long as the button on the remote control is pressed. Switch on interior lights and courtesy light Locking 1. Close the driver's door. Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.

2. Press button on the remote con‐ These functions are not available if the interior trol. lights were switched off manually. All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap The light functions may depend on the ambient are locked. brightness.

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 40

CONTROLS Opening and closing

After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing ▷ Press button on the remote control the button again. and hold for at least 3 seconds. ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐ Tailgate trol three times in succession.

General information To switch off the alarm: press any button. To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. Replacing the battery Depending on your vehicle's equipment and 1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐ the country version, it is possible to specify mote control, refer to page 42. whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐ 2. Slide the integrated key into the opening locking with the remote control. Adjusting the and raise the cover. settings, refer to page 48. The battery compartment is accessible.

Safety information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀

NOTE

The tailgate swings back and up when it 3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the opens. There is a risk of damage to property. battery compartment and raise the cover. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀

NOTE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear window and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐ jects do not hit the rear window.◀

Opening Press and hold button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐ ward.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 41

Opening and closing CONTROLS

4. Push battery in the direction of the arrow ▷ Interference of the radio connection from using a pointed object and lift it out. transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power. ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. Do not transport the remote control to‐ gether with metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the remote control. Do not transport the remote control to‐ 5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐ gether with electronic devices. tive side facing up. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a 6. Insert lid and cover. charging process of mobile devices, for in‐ 7. Push the integrated key into the remote stance charging of a mobile phone. control until it engages. In the case of interference, the vehicle can be Have old batteries disposed of by a unlocked and locked from the outside with the dealer’s service center or another quali‐ integrated key, refer to page 42. fied service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point. Starting the engine via emergency detection of the remote control Additional remote controls Additional remote controls are available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of the remote controls A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐ placed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. It is not possible to start the engine if the re‐ Malfunction mote control has not been detected. It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready General information state if the remote control has not been de‐ A Check Control message is displayed. tected. Remote control detection by the vehicle may Proceed as follows in this case: malfunction under the following circumstances: 1. Hold the remote control as shown against ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ the marked area on the steering column. charged. Replacing the battery, refer to Pay attention to the display in the instru‐ page 40. ment cluster. 2. If the remote control is detected: Start the engine within 10 seconds.

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 42

CONTROLS Opening and closing

If the remote control is not detected, slightly Locking/unlocking via the door lock change the position of the remote control and 1. Remove lid on the door lock. repeat the procedure. To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid. Integrated key

General information The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without remote control using the integrated key.

Safety information

WARNING 2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the Unlocking from the inside is only possible integrated key. with special knowledge. The other doors must be unlocked or locked Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ from the inside. cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock Alarm system the vehicle from the outside when there are The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ people in it.◀ cle is locked with the integrated key. NOTE The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via The door lock is permanently joined with the door lock. In order to stop this alarm, un‐ the door. The door handle can be moved. lock vehicle with the remote control or switch When pulling the door handle with the on the ignition, if needed, through emergency integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated detection of the remote control, refer to key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage page 41. to property. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.◀

Removing Buttons for the central locking system

General information In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 43

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Overview All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, such as in your pants pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

General information Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle. Buttons for the central locking system. ▷ Convenient closing. ▷ Open the tailgate. Locking Press the button with the front doors Functional requirements closed. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle near ▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. the doors. ▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not when locking. possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Unlocking Unlocking Press button.

Opening

▷ Press button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest. ▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors re‐ On the driver's or front passenger's outer door main locked. handle, press the button. ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first time un‐ Depending on the settings, refer to page 48, locks the door, the second time opens it. only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap The other doors remain locked. may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking with the remote control, pressing the button on the outer door handle again does not unlock the Comfort Access other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again. Concept If a door of a locked vehicle was opened from the inside via the door opener, pressing the The vehicle can be accessed without activating button on the outer door handle first locks the the remote control.

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 44

CONTROLS Opening and closing

vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the The exterior mirrors are folded in. outer door handle must be pressed again. This is the case whether the vehicle was locked Opening the tailgate automatically after driving off or via the central locking system button from the inside. General information If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, Locking locked doors are not unlocked. To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Safety information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀ On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button. NOTE The tailgate swings back and up when it Convenient closing opens. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the Safety information tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀ WARNING NOTE With convenient closing, body parts can Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure the rear window and heat conductors while that the area of movement of the doors is clear driving. There is a risk of damage to property. during convenient closing.◀ Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐ jects do not hit the rear window.◀ Closing Opening

Press and hold down the button on the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle. Press button next on tailgate.

In addition to locking, the windows and glass The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐ sunroof will be closed. ward.

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 45

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Malfunction Safety information Remote control detection by the vehicle may WARNING malfunction under the following circumstances: Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make charged. Replacing the battery, refer to sure that the area of movement of the tailgate page 40. is clear during opening and closing.◀ ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment NOTE with high transmitting power. The tailgate swings back and up when it ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to opens. There is a risk of damage to property. metal objects. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀ Do not transport the remote control to‐ gether with metal objects. NOTE ▷ Interference of the radio connection from Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit mobile phones or other electronic devices the rear window and heat conductors while in direct proximity to the remote control. driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not transport the remote control to‐ Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐ gether with electronic devices. jects do not hit the rear window.◀ Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock‐ ing request recognition function on the door Opening and closing handles. Opening from the outside In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key, refer to page 42.

Tailgate

General information To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. ▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. Depending on your vehicle's equipment and With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or the country version, it is possible to specify have the remote control with you. whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐ Press button next on tailgate. locking with the remote control. Adjusting the ▷ Press and hold button on the re‐ settings, refer to page 48. mote control for approx. 1 second. Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐ mote control, refer to page 40. The tailgate is opened slightly and can be swung upward.

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 46

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Opening from the inside activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied. With Steptronic transmission: If several drivers use their own remote control, With the vehicle stationary, press the the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐ button in the driver's floor area. ing unlocking. These settings are also restored, If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P if the vehicle has been used in the meantime must be engaged first. by a person with a different remote control.

With manual transmission: Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently activated. With the vehicle stationary, press the button in the driver's floor area twice in quick If another driver profile is selected via the Cen‐ succession. tral Information Display (CID), the settings stored in it will be applied automatically. The new driver profile is assigned to the remote Closing control currently used. There is an additional guest profile available that is not assigned to any remote control: it can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver profiles.

Functional requirements For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐ tected remote control must be clearly allocated Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tail‐ to the driver. gate can be used to conveniently pull down the This is the case when: tailgate. ▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐ mote control. ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle. Personal Profile ▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door. Concept Via Personal Profiles, individual settings for sev‐ Settings eral drivers can be stored and called up again The settings for the following systems and func‐ when required. tions are stored in the active profile. The scope of storable settings depends on country and General information equipment. There are three driver profiles with which per‐ ▷ Unlocking and locking. sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐ ▷ Lights. mote control has one of these driver profiles assigned. ▷ Radio. If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐ ▷ Instrument cluster. trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be ▷ Programmable memory buttons. ▷ Volumes, tone.

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 47

Opening and closing CONTROLS

▷ Control Display. The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not ▷ Climate control. assigned to the current remote control. ▷ Navigation. Renaming profiles ▷ PDC Park Distance Control. A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐ ▷ Rearview camera. file to avoid confusion between the profiles. ▷ Head-up Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID): ▷ MINI Driving Modes. 1. "Settings" ▷ Intelligent Safety. 2. "Profiles" Profile management The active profile is selected. 3. Open "Options". Opening profiles 4. "Rename current profile" Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐ ferent profile may be activated. This allows you Reset profiles to call up personal vehicle settings, even if you The settings of the profile currently in use are did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐ reset to their factory settings. mote control. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 2. "Profiles" 3. Open "Options". 3. Select a profile. 4. "Reset current profile" The following functions are executed: ▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile Exporting profiles are automatically applied. Most settings of the profile currently in use can ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐ be exported. mote control being used at the time. Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐ personal settings, for instance before delivering ent remote control, this profile will apply to the vehicle to a workshop. Profiles can be taken both remote controls. to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Profile function. Using a guest profile Via the Central Information Display (CID): The guest profile is for individual settings that 1. "Settings" are stored in none of the three personal pro‐ files. 2. "Profiles" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. "Export profile" 4. "USB device" 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" Importing profiles 3. "Guest" Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be 4. Adjust the settings. imported via the USB interface.

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 48

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ These settings are stored for the driver profile, ported profile. refer to page 46, currently used. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Unlocking 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" Doors 3. "Import profile" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. "USB device" 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" Display profile list during start 3. Select the symbol. The profile list can be displayed during each start to select the desired profile. 4. Select the desired function. Via the Central Information Display (CID): ▷ "Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler 1. "Settings" flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ 2. "Profiles" locks the entire vehicle. 3. Open "Options". ▷ "All doors" 4. "Display user list at startup" The entire vehicle is unlocked.

System limits Tailgate A clear assignment between the remote control Via the Central Information Display (CID): and driver may not be possible in the following cases, for example. 1. "Settings" ▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his 2. "Doors/key" or her own remote control, but another 3. Select the symbol. person is driving. 4. Select the desired setting. ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort ▷ "Tailgate" Access and has multiple remote controls Only the tailgate is unlocked. with him or her. ▷ "Tailgate + door(s)" ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked. The tailgate and the doors are un‐ locked. ▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐ side of the vehicle. Depending on optional features and country version, this setting is not offered in some cases. Settings Automatic locking General information Via the Central Information Display (CID): Depending on your vehicle's equipment and 1. "Settings" the country version, various settings for open‐ 2. "Doors/key" ing and closing are possible. 3. Select the desired setting. ▷ "Lock if no door is opened"

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 49

Opening and closing CONTROLS

The vehicle locks automatically after a ▷ By switching on the hazard warning system. short period of time if no door is ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. opened after unlocking. ▷ "Lock after start driving" Overview The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Select the desired setting. ▷ With alarm system: Indicator light on the interior mirror. "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" Unlocking is signaled by one honk of Switching on/off the horn. When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" with the remote control or with Comfort Access, the alarm system is switched off and on at the Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, same time. locking by one. Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on Alarm system The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the General information integrated key in the door lock. When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm Switching off the alarm, refer to page 50. system reacts to the following changes: ▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood Opening the tailgate with the alarm or the tailgate. system switched on ▷ Movements in the car's interior. The tailgate can be opened even when the ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ alarm system is switched on. tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and the vehicle. monitored again provided the doors are ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. locked. The hazard warning system flashes ▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Di‐ once. agnosis. Panic mode The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically: You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. ▷ Acoustic alarm. ▷ Press button on the remote control Depending on local regulations, the acous‐ and hold for at least 3 seconds. tic alarm may be suppressed.

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 50

CONTROLS Opening and closing

▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐ ▷ In automatic vehicle washes. trol three times in succession. ▷ In duplex garages. To switch off the alarm: press any button. ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer. Signals of the indicator light ▷ With animals in the vehicle. ▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every ▷ At the gas station: if the vehicle is locked af‐ 2 seconds: ter refueling starts. The alarm system is switched on. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion ▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐ sensor can be switched off in such situations. onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐ onds: Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate Press the remote control button again are not correctly closed. Correctly closed within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi‐ access points are secured. cle is locked. When the still open access points are The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm onds and then continues to flash. sensor will be switched on. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor ▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking: are switched off until the vehicle is locked The vehicle has not been tampered with. again. ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but Switching off the alarm no longer than approx. 5 minutes: ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control An alarm has been triggered. or switch on the ignition, if needed through emergency detection of remote control, re‐ Tilt alarm sensor fer to page 41. The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. ▷ With Comfort Access: If you have the re‐ The alarm system responds in situations such as mote control with you, unlock the vehicle attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is using the button on the driver's side or pas‐ towed. senger side door.

Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be Power windows closed for the system to function properly. General information Avoiding unintentional alarms If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed except a General information gap. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 51

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Safety information The window opens while the switch is being held. WARNING

When operating the windows, body parts ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of ance point. injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure The window opens automatically. Pressing that the area of movement of the windows is the switch again stops the motion. clear during opening and closing.◀ Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐ Overview fer to page 39.

On 5-door models Closing

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is being held.

▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion. Power windows Convenient closing via the remote control, refer to page 39. Safety switch Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 44.

Jam protection system On 3-door models General information If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a window closes, closing is interrupted. The window opens slightly.

Safety information WARNING Accessories on the windows such as an‐ Power windows tennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.◀ Opening

▷ Press the switch to the resistance point.

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 52

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Closing without the jam protection ▷ The power window motors are equipped system with overheating protection. If a window is In case of danger from the outside or if ice opened and closed several times within a might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐ short period of time, the overheating pro‐ lows: tection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the degree of overheating, it may only be possible to close the window 1. Pull the switch past the resistance or it may not be possible to operate it at all. point and hold it there. In this case: allow the power window motor The window closes with limited jam protec‐ to cool down. tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted. Initializing the system

2. Pull the switch past the resistance The system can be initialized when the vehicle point again within approx. 4 seconds and is stationary and the engine is running. hold it there. During initialization, the affected window The window closes without jam protection. closes without jam protection. WARNING On 5-door models: safety switch When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of General information injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure The safety switch in the driver's door can be that the area of movement of the windows is used to prevent children, for instance from clear during opening and closing.◀ opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear. 1. Open the affected window completely. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the 2. Pull the switch to the resistance point safety function is switched off automatically. and hold. Switching on/off The window closes.

Press button. 3. Continue holding the switch pulled to The LED lights up if the safety function the resistance point. is switched on. The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds, depending on the Malfunction vehicle's equipment. 4. Release switch. General information In certain situations a window can only be op‐ erated to a limited extent. Panoramic glass sun‐ ▷ After a power failure during the opening or roof closing process, the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system General information must be initialized in this case. In the event of a severe accident, the glass sun‐ roof is automatically closed.

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 53

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Safety information The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is WARNING pressed. Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ ▷ Press the switch back beyond the resist‐ ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. ance point and release it. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐ The glass sunroof is opened. ing.◀ Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Overview Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐ terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position. Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐ roof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

Tilting the glass sunroof With the glass sunroof open Press back the switch up to or ▷ Slide switch forward to the beyond the resistance point and resistance point and hold. release it. The glass sunroof is closed as The glass sunroof is raised. long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised posi‐ tion. Opening glass sunroof ▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐ ance point and release it. When the glass sunroof is closed The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the Press the switch back beyond raised position. the resistance point and release Pressing the switch again stops the motion. it twice. ▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐ The glass sunroof is opened. ance point and release it twice. Pressing the switch again stops The glass sunroof is closed. the motion. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised ▷ Slide switch back to the re‐ sistance point and hold.

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 54

CONTROLS Opening and closing

With the glass sunroof completely raised Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it. The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

General information If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a glass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter‐ rupted. The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection system If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐ lows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted. 2. Push the switch forward again past the re‐ sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐ roof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power interruption After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI recommends having this work performed only by a dealer's service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop.

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 55

Settings CONTROLS

Settings

Vehicle features and op‐ WARNING tions With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of safety gear, including safety This chapter describes all standard, country- belts can no longer be ensured. There is a risk specific and optional features offered with the of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. series. It also describes features that are not There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the to the selected options or country versions. This backrest so that it is in the most upright posi‐ also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tion as possible and do not adjust again while tems. When using these functions and systems, driving.◀ the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. WARNING There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ Sitting safely age to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ An ideal seating position that meets the needs justment.◀ of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. Adjusting seats In the event of an accident, the correct seating position plays an important role. Follow the in‐ Overview formation in the following chapters: ▷ Seats, refer to page 55. ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 57. ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 59. ▷ Airbags, refer to page 115.

Front seats 1 Forward/backward Safety information 2 Thigh support WARNING 3 Height Seat adjustments while driving can lead 4 Backrest tilt to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.◀

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 56

CONTROLS Settings

Forward/backward Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐ gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly making sure it engages prop‐ erly. Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease the curvature. Height Thigh support

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support. Backrest tilt In 3-door models: entering the rear

Safety information WARNING There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ age to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ justment.◀ Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 57

Settings CONTROLS

WARNING Front seat heating Unexpected movements of the backrest while driving may occur due to an unlocked Overview backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the backrests before driving.◀

Folding down the backrest 1. Pull lever up to the stop.

Seat heating

Switching on Press button once for each tempera‐ ture level. 2. Fold backrest forward. The maximum temperature is reached when 3. Push the seat forward. three LEDs are lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ Original position nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐ The driver's seat features a mechanical mem‐ tomatically with the temperature selected last. ory function for forward/back and backrest ad‐ When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to justment. page 190, the heater output is reduced. 1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐ tion. Switching off 2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. Press and hold the button, until the If the backrest is folded back when the seat is LEDs go out. not yet in the original position, the seat en‐ gages in the current position. In this case, man‐ ually adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 56. Safety belts Number of safety belts and safety belt buckles The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety belts to ensure occupants' safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly. The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right.

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 58

CONTROLS Settings

The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is WARNING intended for the person sitting in the middle. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in General information the following situations: Always make sure that safety belts are being ▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐ damaged, soiled, or changed in any other though airbags enhance safety by providing way. added protection, they are not a substitute for ▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were safety belts. modified. If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in from the belt buckle on the side. the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐ The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety be correct for adult seat occupants of every belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt build if the seat is correctly adjusted. retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident Safety information at the dealer’s service center or another quali‐ WARNING fied service center or repair shop.◀ Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of Correct use of safety belts the safety belt to serve its protective func‐ ▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to tion.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. your body over your lap and shoulders. Do not allow more than one person to wear a ▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over single safety belt. Infants and children are not your lap. The safety belt may not press on allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be your stomach. transported and secured in designated child re‐ straint systems.◀ ▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or WARNING fragile objects. The efficacy of safety gear, including ▷ Avoid thick clothing. safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐ belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly ward around your upper body. fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐ ries, for instance in the event of an accident or Buckling the safety belt during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is 1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure holder when fastening it. that all occupants are wearing safety belts cor‐ rectly.◀

WARNING With a rear backrest that is not locked, the protective function of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.◀

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 59

Settings CONTROLS

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage ports the back of the head at as close to audibly. eye level as possible. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the back‐ rest tilt as needed.◀ WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.◀

Unbuckling the safety belt WARNING 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. Objects on the head restraint reduce the 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. protective effect in the head and neck area. 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up There is a risk of injury. mechanism. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes Safety belt reminder for driver's seat hangers, directly on the head restraint. and front passenger seat ▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐ mined to be safe for attachment to a head Display in the instrument cluster restraint. The indicator light lights up and a signal ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pil‐ sounds. Make sure that the safety belts lows, while driving.◀ are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are Adjusting the height: John Cooper placed on the front passenger seat. Works sport seat The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐ justed. Front head restraints Adjusting the height Safety information WARNING A missing protective effect due to re‐ moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. ▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐ straints on the occupied seats.

▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 60

CONTROLS Settings

▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ After setting the height, move the head re‐ ports the back of the head at as close to straint up or down slightly, making sure it en‐ eye level as possible. gages properly. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the back‐ Removing: John Cooper Works sport rest tilt as needed.◀ seat The head restraints cannot be removed. WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving Removing the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Make sure that the area of movement is clear sitting in the seat in question. when moving the head restraint.◀ WARNING Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint. ▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐ 1. Fold the seat backrest forward if needed. mined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint. 2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible. ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pil‐ 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the lows, while driving.◀ head restraint out completely. Adjusting the height Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information WARNING A missing protective effect due to re‐ ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints push the head restraint down. can cause injuries in the head and neck area. ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. There is a risk of injury. After setting the height, move the head re‐ ▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐ straint up or down slightly, making sure it en‐ straints on the occupied seats. gages properly.

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 61

Settings CONTROLS

Fold down Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Safety information WARNING ▷ To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, Objects reflected in the mirror are closer and press down the head restraint, arrow 2. than they appear. The distance to the traffic ▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐ front as far as it will go. Make sure that the stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of head restraint engages correctly. an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.◀ Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Overview sitting in the seat in question.

1 Settings 1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor page 177, in question. 3 Folding in and out 2. Pull head restraint up against the resist‐ ance. Selecting a mirror 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely. To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch. Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head Adjusting electrically restraint. Press button. The mirror movement follows the but‐ ton movement.

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 62

CONTROLS Settings

Malfunction Activating In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror 1. Slide the switch to the driver's side glass. mirror position. 2. Engage selector lever position R. Folding in and out NOTE Deactivating Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐ Slide the switch to the passenger's side hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There mirror position. is a risk of damage to property. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀ Interior mirror, manually dimmable Press button. Flip lever

Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap‐ prox. 15 mph/20 km/h. Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations: ▷ In vehicle washes. ▷ On narrow roads. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mirror, flip the lever forward. Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated Turn knob whenever the ignition is switched on.

Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐ matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's inte‐ rior mirror, refer to page 63, are used to con‐ trol this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror

Concept Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror. If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 63

Settings CONTROLS

Interior mirror, automatic dimming Settings feature

Overview

1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ Photocells are used for control: tion. ▷ In the mirror glass. 3. Fold the lever back up. ▷ On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements ▷ Keep the photocells clean. ▷ Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information WARNING Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐ ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.◀

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 64

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and op‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This tions also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- tems. When using these functions and systems, specific and optional features offered with the the applicable laws and regulations must be series. It also describes features that are not observed.

The right place for children Safety information system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, and size. WARNING Unattended children or animals can Safety information cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐ WARNING lowing actions: The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable additional child restraint sys‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake. tems. The efficacy of safety gear, including ▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows. safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly ▷ Using vehicle equipment. fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐ ries, for instance in the event of an accident or There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure chil‐ hicle. Take the remote control with you when dren shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ child restraint systems.◀

Always transport children in the rear Children on the front passenger seat seat General information General information Before using a child restraint system on the Accident research shows that the safest place front passenger seat, ensure that the front, for children is in the rear seat. knee, and side airbags on the front passenger Transport children younger than 13 years of side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear front-seat passenger airbags, refer to seat in suitable child restraint systems designed page 117. for the age, weight and size of the child. Chil‐ dren 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 65

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Safety information vers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have damaged child restraint systems or of WARNING child restraint systems exposed to an accident Active front-seat passenger airbags can and their fastening systems checked and possi‐ injure a child in a child restraint system when bly replaced by the dealer’s service center or the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐ another qualified service center or repair jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger shop.◀ airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.◀ WARNING The stability of the child restraint system WARNING is limited or compromised with incorrect seat The stability of the child restraint system adjustment or improper installation of the child is limited or compromised with incorrect seat seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. adjustment or improper installation of the child Make sure that the child restraint system fits seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust Make sure that the child restraint system fits the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and and backrests are securely engaged or locked. correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ and backrests are securely engaged or locked. straints or remove them.◀ If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ straints or remove them.◀ On the rear seats In order to facilitate the installation of a back- facing child restraint system: Installing child re‐ Move the front passenger seat as far up as pos‐ straint systems sible before folding down the backrest.

General information On the front passenger seat Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, Deactivating airbags installing, and using child restraint systems. WARNING In order to faciliate the installation of a back- Active front-seat passenger airbags can facing child restraint system in the rear: injure a child in a child restraint system when Move the front passenger seat as far up as pos‐ the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐ sible before folding down the backrest. jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ Safety information GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.◀ WARNING After installing a child restraint system in the The protective effect of damaged child front passenger seat, make sure that the front, restraint systems or of child restraint systems knee and side airbags on the front passenger exposed to an accident and their fastening sys‐ side are deactivated. tems can be limited or lost. A child can e.g.,not Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐ sufficiently restrained, for instance in the event tomatically, refer to page 117. of an accident or braking and evasive maneu‐

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 66

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Seat position and height Locking the safety belt Before installing a child restraint system, move 1. Pull out the belt strap completely. the front passenger seat as far back as possible 2. Secure the child restraint system with the and adjust its height to the highest and thus safety belt. best possible position for the belt and to offer 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull optimal protection in the event of an accident. it tight against the child restraint system. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐ The safety belt is locked. cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully for‐ Unlocking the safety belt ward until the best possible belt guide position 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. is reached. 2. Remove the child restraint system. Child seat security 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐ pletely.

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

LATCH child restraint fixing system General information Safety information LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. WARNING Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐ If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems mation of the child restraint system manufac‐ are not correctly engaged, the protective effect turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐ of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can straint fixing systems. be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐ Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐ The lower anchors may be used to attach the straint fixing system fits securely against the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child backrest.◀ and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 67

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Position WARNING If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐ Symbol Meaning tective effect of the child restraint system is lim‐ The corresponding symbol ited or there is none. In particular situations, for shows the mounts for the instance braking maneuvers or in case of an ac‐ lower LATCH anchors. cident, the rear backrest can fold forward. Seats equipped with lower an‐ There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make chors are marked with a pair, sure that the rear backrests are locked.◀ 2, of LATCH symbols. NOTE For vehicles equipped with a The anchors for the upper retaining straps middle seat: of child restraint systems are only provided for It is not recommended to use these retaining straps. When other objects are the inner lower anchors of mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There standard outer LATCH posi‐ is a risk of damage to property. Only mount tions to fasten a child restraint child restraint systems to the upper retaining system on the middle seat. Use straps.◀ the vehicle safety belt instead for the middle seat. Anchors The respective symbol shows the an‐ Before installing LATCH child restraint chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats fixing systems with an upper top tether are marked Pull the safety belt away from the area of the with this symbol. It can be found on the rear child restraint system. seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems Routing the retaining strap 1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐ turer's information. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly connected.

Child restraint systems with tether strap

Safety information WARNING 1 Direction of travel If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly 2 Head restraint used for the child restraint system, the protec‐ tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐ 3 Hook for upper retaining strap jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is 4 Anchor not guided across sharp edges and without 5 Seat backrest twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀ 6 Upper retaining strap

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 68

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed. 2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head re‐ straint. 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the rear seat. 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

ON 5-door models: Lock‐ ing the doors and win‐ dows

Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up. The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear Press button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the rear.

This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 52.

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 69

Driving CONTROLS

Driving

Vehicle features and op‐ To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary tions electronic systems/power consumers. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Ignition off series. It also describes features that are not Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal. to the selected options or country versions. This Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ position P, press the Start/Stop button again tems. When using these functions and systems, without stepping on the brake. the applicable laws and regulations must be All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go observed. out. To save battery power when the engine is off, Start/Stop button switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Concept Safety measures Pressing the Start/Stop button The ignition is switched off automatically in the switches the ignition on or off following situations while the vehicle is station‐ and starts the engine. ary and the engine is off: Steptronic transmission: the en‐ ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the gine starts in selector lever posi‐ low beams are switched on. tion P or N with the brake pedal pressed when ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged you press the Start/Stop button. completely, so that the engine can still be Manual transmission: the engine starts with the started. This function is only available when clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop but‐ the low beams are switched off. ton is pressed. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the Ignition on low beams are switched off. Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐ ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled ton without stepping on the clutch pedal. with driver's door open and low beams off. Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop ▷ When the front doors are opened if there is button, and do not press on the brake pedal at no other person sitting in the front seats. the same time. ▷ The low beams switch to parking lights af‐ All vehicle systems are ready for operation. ter some minutes of no use. Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐ Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated se‐ strument cluster light up for a varied length of lector lever, refer to page 83: when switching time. off the ignition, the selector lever position P is

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 70

CONTROLS Driving

engaged automatically if the selector lever po‐ Starting the engine sition D or R is engaged. Safety information Radio-ready state DANGER General information If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐ In the radio-ready state, certain power con‐ tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can sumers remain ready for operation. enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ tain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. Activating In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accu‐ mulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger With the engine running, press the Start/Stop to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure button. sufficient ventilation.◀ If the engine is not running and the ignition is switched on: the system automatically activates WARNING radio-ready state when the door is opened if An unsecured vehicle can begin to move the lights are switched off or the daytime run‐ and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐ ning lights are switched on. dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐ rolling. stance the ignition is automatically switched off In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured for the following reasons: against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, ▷ When automatically switching from low turn the front wheels in the direction of the beams to parking lights. curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Switching off automatically also secure the vehicle, for instance with a The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐ wheel chock.◀ cally in the following situations: NOTE ▷ If the driver's or front passenger door is In the case of repeated starting attempts opened when exiting the vehicle, with the or repeated starting in quick succession, the engine switched off manually. fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned. ▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with The catalytic converter can overheat. There is a the Start/Stop button. risk of damage to property. Avoid repeated ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. starting in quick succession.◀ ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system. Steptronic transmission ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be Starting the engine started. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Engage selector lever position P or N. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 71

Driving CONTROLS

The ignition is activated automatically for a ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine turn the front wheels in the direction of the starts. curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Manual transmission also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.◀ Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. Steptronic transmission 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐ tral. Switching off the engine 3. Press the Start/Stop button. 1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake. The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine 2. Engage selector lever position P. starts. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. The radio-ready state is switched on. Engine stop Manual transmission Safety information WARNING Switching off the engine Unattended children or animals can 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ Start/Stop button. selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐ The engine is switched off. lowing actions: The radio-ready state is switched on. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. 3. Set the parking brake. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. Auto Start/Stop function There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Concept leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the remote control with you when The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traf‐ WARNING fic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The An unsecured vehicle can begin to move engine starts automatically for driving off. and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐ After every start of the engine using the Start/ dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in rolling. the last selected state, refer to page 73. When In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is avail‐ against rolling away, follow the following: able when the vehicle is traveling faster than about 3 mph/5 km/h. ▷ Set the parking brake.

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 72

CONTROLS Driving

Depending on the selected driving mode, refer Functional limitations to page 136, the system is automatically acti‐ The engine is not switched off automatically in vated or deactivated. the following situations: ▷ External temperature too low. Engine stop ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ Functional requirements matic climate control is running. The engine is switched off automatically during ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated a stop under the following conditions: or cooled to the required level. Manual transmission: ▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐ ture. ▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed. ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed. ▷ After driving in reverse. Steptronic transmission: ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ tion D. ▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low. ▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while ▷ At higher elevations. the vehicle is stopped. ▷ The hood is unlocked. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the ▷ The parking assistant is activated. driver's door is closed. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. In order to be able to release the brake pedal, ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position R, N engage the selector lever in position P. The en‐ or M/S. gine remains off. To continue driving depress the brake pedal. Starting the engine When a gear is engaged, the engine starts au‐ The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ tomatically. lowing conditions: The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced ▷ Manual transmission: clutch pedal is when the engine is switched off. pressed. Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the brake pedal. The display indicates that the After the engine starts, accelerate as usual. Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start. Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of The display indicates that the the following conditions are met: conditions for an automatic en‐ ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and gine stop have not been met. the driver's door is open. ▷ The hood was unlocked.

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 73

Driving CONTROLS

Some indicator lights light up for a varied ▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is length of time. deactivated. The engine can only be started via the Start/ The engine is started during an automatic Stop button. engine stop. The engine can only be stopped or started Functional limitations via the Start/Stop button. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ ▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐ vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ tivated. lowing situations: ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior Switching off the vehicle during an when the air conditioning is switched on. automatic engine stop ▷ The steering wheel is turned. During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐ can be switched off permanently, for instance tor lever position D to R, N or M/S. when leaving it. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐ Steptronic transmission: tor lever position P to R, N, D or M/S. 1. Engage selector lever position P. ▷ The vehicle begins rolling. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is matic climate control is switched on. deactivated. ▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low. 3. Set the parking brake. ▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when Manual transmission: the heating is switched on. 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is ▷ Manual transmission: low brake vacuum switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is pressure; this can occur, for instance if the deactivated. brake pedal is depressed a number of times 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. in succession. 3. Set the parking brake. Switching the system on/off Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Using the button Automatic deactivation In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐ tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐ sons, for instance if no driver is detected.

Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s Press button. service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop.

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 74

CONTROLS Driving

Parking brake Releasing

Safety information WARNING An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide ▷ Set the parking brake. the lever down. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. Turn signal, high beams, ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, headlight flasher also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.◀ Turn signal

Applying Using turn signals The lever automatically engages after being pulled up. The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set. Lower light: indicator light in Canadian models

If for once use during driving is required, en‐ gage the parking brake slightly and hold the button down. Press the lever past the resistance point. To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐ Canada: the lever returns into its starting posi‐ tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically tion after actuation. To switch off manually, while coasting, if traffic conditions permit. slightly tap the lever to the resistance point. The brake lights will not light up if the parking brake is set. Triple turn signal activation Lightly tap the lever up or down. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting"

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 75

Driving CONTROLS

3. "Triple turn signal" the wipers are in the folded away state and the The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ wipers are folded in when switching on.◀ rently used. NOTE Signaling briefly If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper Press the lever to the resistance point and hold motor can overheat when switching on. There it there for as long as you want the turn signal is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the to flash. windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀ Malfunction Switching on Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. ▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0. ▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐ ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. tion 1. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. ▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2. ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐ Washer/wiper system tem switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed. General information Switching off and brief wipe Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐ age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Press the lever down. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 76

CONTROLS Driving

▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it Deactivating reaches its standard position. Press the lever back into the standard position. ▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position. Setting the frequency or sensitivity of The lever automatically returns to its initial the rain sensor position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency The sensor is located on the windshield, directly or sensitivity of the rain sensor. in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is sensor. preset. Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor. Safety information NOTE Windshield washer system If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. Safety information There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐ vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀ WARNING The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐ Activating dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀

NOTE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.◀ Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐ tion, arrow 1. Wiping is started. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 77

Driving CONTROLS

Cleaning the windshield ▷ In resting position: turn the switch down‐ ward, arrow 3. The switch automatically re‐ turns to its resting position when released. ▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch fur‐ ther, arrow 2. The switch automatically re‐ turns to its intermittent position when re‐ leased.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept Pull the lever. The fold-out position enables the wipers to be The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ folded away from the windshield. shield and activates the wipers briefly. General information Windshield washer nozzles Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐ The washer jets are automatically heated der frosty conditions, for instance. whenever the ignition is switched on. Safety information Rear window wiper WARNING Overview If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐ age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.◀

NOTE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There Switching on the rear window wiper is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the Turn the outer switch upward. windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀ ▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse Folding away the wipers gear is engaged, the system switches to 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. continuous operation.

Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 78

CONTROLS Driving

2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until Safety information the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐ WARNING tion. If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐ age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.◀

NOTE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper windshield. motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀

Switching on

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance shield. point. 2. Switch on the ignition. ▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to ▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once their resting position and are ready again beyond the resistance point. for operation. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released.

Canada: wiper system

General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 79

Driving CONTROLS

Switching off and brief wipe Activating/deactivating

Press the lever down. Press the button on the wiper lever. ▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press Wiping is started. down twice. If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the ▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed: LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. press down once. If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐ ▷ Brief wipe: press down once. tion is deactivated. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ During trip interruption with the rain sensor sition when released. switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐ prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐ Interval mode or rain sensor cally activated again.

Concept Setting the frequency or sensitivity of The rain sensor automatically controls the time the rain sensor between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency NOTE or sensitivity of the rain sensor. If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. sensor. There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐ Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀ sensor.

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 80

CONTROLS Driving

Windshield washer system Rear window wiper

Safety information Overview WARNING The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐ dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀

NOTE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not Switching on the rear window wiper use the washer system when the washer fluid Turn the outer switch upward. reservoir is empty.◀ ▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse Cleaning the windshield gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. ▷ In resting position: turn the switch down‐ ward, arrow 3. The switch automatically re‐ turns to its resting position when released. ▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch fur‐ ther, arrow 2. The switch automatically re‐ Pull the lever. turns to its intermittent position when re‐ The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ leased. shield and activates the wipers briefly. Fold-away position of the wipers Windshield washer nozzles Concept The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on. The fold-out position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐ der frosty conditions, for instance.

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 81

Driving CONTROLS

Safety information Folding down the wipers WARNING After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated. If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐ 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a shield. risk of injury or risk of damage to property. 2. Switch on the ignition. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to wipers are folded in when switching on.◀ their resting position and are ready again for operation. NOTE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper Washer fluid motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the General information windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀ All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐ voir. Folding away the wipers Use a mixture of tap water and windshield 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield 2. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point washer concentrate containing antifreeze can of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ be used. onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly Recommended minimum fill quantity: vertical position 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information WARNING Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the in‐ structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐ ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐ 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the erating materials out of reach of children. windshield. United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ tainer. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.◀

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 82

CONTROLS Driving

WARNING Manual transmission Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of Safety information injury or risk of damage to property. Only add WARNING washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move ervoir.◀ and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against NOTE rolling. Silicon-containing additives in the washer In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win‐ against rolling away, follow the following: dows can lead to damage to the washing sys‐ ▷ Set the parking brake. tem. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add silicon-containing additives to the ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, washer fluid.◀ turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. NOTE ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Mixing different windshield washer con‐ also secure the vehicle, for instance with a centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐ wheel chock.◀ ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ NOTE erty. Do not mix different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the informa‐ When shifting to a lower gear, excessive tion and mixing ratios provided on the contain‐ speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk ers.◀ of damage to property. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.◀ Overview Schematic diagram

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐ gine compartment. ▷ 1 – 6: forward gears Malfunction ▷ R: reverse The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐ centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 83

Driving CONTROLS

Shifting ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the General information curb. Depending on the engine installation, the en‐ ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, gine speed during a shifting operation is ad‐ also secure the vehicle, for instance with a justed automatically as required for harmo‐ wheel chock.◀ nious and dynamic gear shifting. Selector lever version Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. General information To overcome the resistance push the gearshift Depending on the vehicle equipment, a trans‐ lever dynamically to the left and engage re‐ mission with either a latching selector lever or a verse gear with a forward shifting movement. tap-operated selector lever is installed.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle Transmission with a latching selector lever In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power, for instance in a vehicle wash, or be pushed. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a forward gear or reverse. 3. Release the parking brake.

Steptronic transmission The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are selected by moving the selector lever into the Concept respective selector lever position. The selector lever engages in the selector lever positions. The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ tions of an automatic transmission with the possibility of manual shifting, if needed. Transmission with a tap-operated selector lever Safety information WARNING An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Set the parking brake. The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are selected by tapping the selector lever forward

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 84

CONTROLS Driving

or back. The selector lever automatically re‐ off, refer to page 69, while selector lever turns to the center position when released. position R, D or M/S is engaged. Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ ▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the cally, refer to page 84, in certain situations. driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is sta‐ tionary and selector lever position D, M/S or Selector lever positions R is engaged. Drive mode D ▷ After the ignition has been switched off while selector lever position N is engaged. Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ ation. All gears for forward travel are activated Engaging selector lever positions: with automatically. a latching selector lever Reverse R General information Engage selector lever position R only when the To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you vehicle is stationary. select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. Neutral N The vehicle may be pushed or roll without en‐ Functional requirements gine power in selector lever position N, for in‐ The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐ stance in vehicle washes, refer to page 86. lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running. Parking position P Engaging selector lever position D, N, R, General information or P Selector lever position, for instance for parking With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake the vehicle. pedal before shifting out of selector lever posi‐ The transmission blocks the drive wheels in se‐ tion P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be lector lever position P. deactivated and the shift command will not be Engage selector lever position P only when the executed. vehicle is stationary. A selector lever lock prevents the following Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐ faulty operation: lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐ ▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever hicle may begin to move. position P or R.

Automatic parking position for a transmission with a tap-operated selector lever Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally in situations such as the following: ▷ After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to page 70, or when the ignition is switched

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 85

Driving CONTROLS

▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever Engaging selector lever position D, N, R position P into another selector lever posi‐ A selector lever lock prevents the following tion. faulty operation: 1. To release the selector lever lock: with the ▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever brake pedal depressed, press the button on position R. the front of the selector lever. ▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever posi‐ tion. 1. Press and hold the button to release the se‐ lector lever lock.

2. Move the selector lever into the desired po‐ sition.

2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push the selector lever in the desired direc‐ tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released.

Engaging selector lever positions: with a tap-operated selector lever

General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Functional requirements Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever posi‐ tion P to another selector lever position. Depending on the transmission version, the en‐ gine may have to be running too.

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 86

CONTROLS Driving

Engaging selector lever position P 4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage selector lever position N. 5. Switch the engine off. In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ played. The vehicle may roll. NOTE Selector lever position P is automatically Press button P. engaged when the ignition is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch drive-ready state off in vehicle washes.◀ Rolling or pushing the vehicle Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever General information position P is automatically engaged after ap‐ prox. 15 minutes. In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance If there is a malfunction, you may not be able in a vehicle wash, or be pushed. to change the selector lever position. Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if Engaging selector lever position N: with needed, refer to page 89. a latching selector lever 1. Switch on the ignition. Kickdown 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal be‐ 3. Depress the brake pedal. yond the resistance point at the full throttle po‐ 4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage sition. selector lever position N. 5. Release brake. Sport program M/S The vehicle may roll. Concept If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐ Manually unlock the transmission lock, if ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts needed, refer to page 88. up later and the shifting times are shorter. Engaging selector lever position N: with a tap-operated selector lever 1. Start the engine while pressing on the brake pedal. 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. 3. Depress the brake pedal.

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 87

Driving CONTROLS

Activating the sport program Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ wards. Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ The Steptronic transmission continues shifting tor lever position D. automatically in certain situations, for instance The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ when certain engine speed limits are reached. ment cluster, for instance S1. With a tap-operated selector lever: when M2 is The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ set manually while the vehicle is stationary, the vated. transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is retained until you en‐ gage M1 manually or exit M. Ending the Sport program Push the selector lever to the right. Avoiding automatic upshifting D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as Manual mode M/S needed. MINI John Cooper Works: once particular en‐ Concept gine speeds are attained, upshifting is not auto‐ Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual matically performed in M/S manual mode. mode. For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission, automatic shift operations are not performed if Activating manual mode one of the following conditions is met: 1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐ ▷ DSC is deactivated. lector lever position D, arrow 1. ▷ TRACTION is activated. In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ down. With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐ taneously activating kickdown and operating the left shift paddles. This is not possible by switching briefly via the shift paddles from se‐ lector lever position D to manual mode M/S. 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it Ending the manual mode backward, arrows 2. Push the selector lever to the right.

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 88

CONTROLS Driving

D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Shifting

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport transmission

Concept The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.

General information ▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. Shifting ▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine ▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by and road speeds, for instance downshifting is pulling and holding the left shift paddle. not possible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear. Short-term manual mode In selector lever position D, actuating a shift Displays in the instrument cluster paddle switches into manual mode temporarily. The selector lever position is dis‐ After conservative driving in manual mode played, for example P. without acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the trans‐ mission switches back to automatic mode. It is possible to switch into automatic mode as Releasing the transmission lock follows: manually: with a latching selector lever ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. If the selector lever is locked in selector lever ▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift position P despite the ignition being switched paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. on, the brake pedal being depressed and the button on the selector lever being pressed, the Continuous manual mode transmission lock can be unlocked manually: In selector lever position S, actuating a shift Before unlocking the transmission lock man‐ paddle switches into manual mode perma‐ ually, engage the parking brake forcefully to nently. prevent the vehicle from rolling away. 1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, together with the lower retaining ring, from the cen‐

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 89

Driving CONTROLS

ter console. To do so, pull the retaining ring Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the upward at the rear edge. parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐ ing away.

Engaging selector lever position N Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the engine. 1. Press and hold down brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start. 3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐ 2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector, row 1, and press and hold the selector lever if needed. into selector lever position N, arrow N, until 3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐ selector lever position N is displayed in the hicle tool kit, refer to page 233, press the instrument cluster. yellow release lever downward, see arrow. A Check Control message is displayed.

4. Press the button on the front of the selector 4. Release the selector lever. lever and move the selector lever back slightly. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops. Release the release lever. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own. 5. Bring the selector lever into the desired po‐ sition. For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing. For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing. Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control Releasing the transmission lock electronically: with a tap-operated Concept selector lever Launch Control enables optimum acceleration General information on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐ rounding conditions. Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 90

CONTROLS Driving

General information Repeated use during a trip The use of Launch Control causes premature After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐ component wear since this function represents mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes a very heavy load for the vehicle. before Launch Control can be used again. Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 184, period. After using Launch Control To start with Launch Control do not steer the To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐ steering wheel. namic Stability Control again.

Functional requirements System limits Launch Control is available as soon as the en‐ An experienced driver may be able to achieve gine and transmission are at operating temper‐ better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. ature. The engine is at operating temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at least 6 miles/10 km. Depending on the external temperature and driving style, the transmission requires an unin‐ terrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order to reach the operating temperature required for Launch Control.

Start with launch control While the engine is running:

1. Press button and select SPORT with the MINI Driving Modes switch. The instrument cluster displays TRACTION in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator light lights up. 2. Engage selector lever position S. 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake. 4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown. A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster. 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake.

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 91

Displays CONTROLS

Displays

Vehicle features and op‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This tions also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- tems. When using these functions and systems, specific and optional features offered with the the applicable laws and regulations must be series. It also describes features that are not observed.

Instrument cluster

Overview

1 Tachometer 96 4 Fuel gauge 96 2 Indicator/warning lights 5 Display/reset miles 96 3 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 92

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 92

CONTROLS Displays

Electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems Total miles/trip odometer 96 Messages, for instance Check Control Onboard Computer 100 Time 96 2 Selector lever position 83 External temperature 96 Gear shift indicator 98 Selection lists 100 3 MINI Driving Modes switch status 136

Check Control Indicator/warning lights

Concept General information The indicator/warning lights can light up in a The Check Control system monitors functions in variety of combinations and colors. the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the General information engine is started or the ignition is switched on. A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐ bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS Red lights text messages in the instrument cluster and in Safety belt reminder the Head-up Display. In addition, an acoustic signal may be output Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: and a SMS text message may appear on the safety belt on the driver or passenger Control Display. side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐ minder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 93

Displays CONTROLS

Make sure that the safety belts are positioned Orange lights correctly. Active Cruise Control Airbag system The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead. Airbag system and belt tensioner are not working. Camera-based cruise control, refer to page 139. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has Parking brake been detected ahead of you. The parking brake is set. Indicator light flashes: the conditions are not adequate for the system to work. Release the parking brake, refer to page 74. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. Approach control warning Indicator light illuminates: advance Yellow lights warning is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a colli‐ Anti-lock Braking System ABS sion or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too Braking force boost may not be work‐ small. ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐ Increase distance. ger braking distance into account. Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐ Have the system immediately checked minent danger of a collision when the vehicle by a dealer’s service center or another approaches another vehicle at a relatively high qualified service center or repair shop. differential speed.

Intervention by braking or make an evasive DSC Dynamic Stability Control maneuver. The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehi‐ Person warning cle is stabilized. Reduce speed and If a collision with a person detected in modify your driving style to the driving circum‐ this way is imminent, the symbol lights stances. up and a signal sounds. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐ tioned. Have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. DSC, refer to page 134.

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 94

CONTROLS Displays

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated Have the system checked by a dealer’s service or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated. DSC, refer to page 134, and DTC, refer to page 135. Emissions ▷ The warning light lights up: Flat Tire Monitor FTM Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐ The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of sible. tire inflation pressure in a tire. ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. cumstances: Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐ Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 123. ing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐ The indicator light lights up: the Tire ous engine misfiring within a brief period Pressure Monitor reports a low tire in‐ can seriously damage emission control flation pressure or a flat tire. Follow the components, in particular the catalytic con‐ information in the Check Control message. verter.

The indicator light flashes and then continu‐ Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to ously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire infla‐ page 232. tion pressure can be detected. ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices Rear fog light with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ Rear fog light is switched on. ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again. Rear fog light, refer to page 112. ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐ set the system again. Green lights ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s Turn signal service center or another qualified service Turn signal switched on. center or repair shop as needed. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a light indicates that a turn signal bulb dealer’s service center or another qualified has failed. service center or repair shop. Turn signal, refer to page 74. Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 118.

Parking lights, headlight Steering system Parking lights or headlights are Steering system in some cases not switched on. working. Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, refer to page 109.

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 95

Displays CONTROLS

Front fog lights The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐ onds. After this time, they are displayed again Front fog lights are switched on. automatically. Front fog lights, refer to page 112. Temporary display High-beam Assistant Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐ High-beam Assistant is switched on. matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be dis‐ High beams are switched on and off au‐ played again later. tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐ uation. Displaying stored Check Control High-beam Assistant, refer to page 111. messages Via the Central Information Display (CID): Cruise control 1. "Vehicle info" The system is switched on. It maintains 2. "Vehicle status" the speed that was set using the control 3. "Check Control" elements on the steering wheel. 4. Select the SMS text message.

Blue lights Display

High beams Check Control High beams are switched on. At least one Check Control message is High beams, refer to page 75. displayed or is stored.

Hiding Check Control messages SMS text messages SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐ bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indi‐ cator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. Press and hold button on signal lever. With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display. Continuous display Symbols Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐ Within the supplementary text, the following function is eliminated. If several malfunctions functions can be selected independent of the occur at once, the messages are displayed con‐ check control message. secutively.

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 96

CONTROLS Displays

▷ Display additional information about Reset the trip odometer the Check Control message in the Press the button. Integrated Owner's Manual. ▷ The odometer is displayed ▷ "Service request" when the ignition is switched Contact a dealer’s service center or another off. qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ When the ignition is switched ▷ "Roadside Assistance" on, the trip odometer is re‐ Contact Roadside Assistance. set.

Messages after trip completion Special messages displayed while driving are External temperature displayed again after the ignition is switched off. General information If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal Fuel gauge sounds. A Check Control message is displayed. The arrow beside the fuel pump There is an increased risk of ice on roads. symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Safety information Vehicle tilt position may cause WARNING the display to vary. Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ Information on refueling, refer to page 198. there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on The yellow indicator light illuminates, bridges or shady sections of road. There is a risk once the fuel reserve is reached. of an accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures.◀

Display Tachometer The external temperature is dis‐ Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning played in the instrument cluster. field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine.

Odometer and trip odom‐ eter Time The time is displayed in the in‐ Concept strument cluster. The total number of kilometers driven and the The time can be set via the Cen‐ number of kilometers driven since the last reset tral Information Display (CID). are displayed in the instrument cluster.

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 97

Displays CONTROLS

Date Current fuel consump‐ The date is displayed in the in‐ tion strument cluster. The date can be set via the Cen‐ Concept tral Information Display (CID). Displays the current fuel consumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Range Displaying the current fuel consumption Safety information Via the Central Information Display (CID): NOTE 1. "Settings" With a driving range of less than 2. "Instrument cluster" 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have 3. "Current consumption" sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.◀ Service requirements Display Concept With a low remaining range: The function displays the service requirements ▷ A Check Control message is and the corresponding maintenance scopes. displayed briefly. ▷ The remaining range is General information shown on the Onboard Com‐ After the ignition is switched on the instrument puter. cluster briefly displays available driving distance ▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance or time to the next scheduled maintenance. taking curves aggressively, the engine func‐ A service advisor can read out the current serv‐ tion is not always ensured. ice requirements from your remote control.

The Check Control message appears continu‐ Display ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. Detailed information on service Displaying the cruising range requirements Via the Central Information Display (CID): More information on the type of service re‐ 1. "Settings" quired may be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. 2. "Instrument cluster" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. "Range" 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required"

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 98

CONTROLS Displays

Required maintenance procedures and le‐ General information gally mandated inspections are displayed. Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ try-specific version, the gear shift indicator is tion. active in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and with manual transmission. Symbols Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. Symbols Description No service is currently required. Manual transmission: displaying

Example Description The deadline for scheduled Fuel efficient gear is set. maintenance or a legally man‐ dated inspection is approach‐ ing. Shift into fuel efficient gear. The service deadline has al‐ ready passed. Steptronic transmission: displaying Entering appointment dates Example Description Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐ spections. Fuel efficient gear is set. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. Shift into fuel efficient gear. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" Speed Limit Info 4. "§ Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" Speed Limit Info

6. Adjust the settings. Concept 7. Confirm. Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum The entered date is stored. permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

General information Gear shift indicator The camera at the base of the interior mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as Concept well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic The system recommends the most fuel efficient signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐ gear for the current driving situation. tions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 99

Displays CONTROLS

the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐ ing on the situation. With the navigation system, the system takes into account the information stored in the navi‐ gation data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs. Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐ ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traf‐ fic signs with speed limitations are detected and displayed only. Speed limitations due to Press button on the turn signal lever several entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. times, if needed. are not displayed. Speed limits with extra text Speed Limit Info is displayed on the Info Display characters are always displayed. in the instrument cluster. Safety information Speed Limit Info WARNING The last speed limit detected. The system does not relieve from per‐ Without a navigation system the sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic traffic signals are grayed out af‐ situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust ter curves or longer stretches of driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic roadway. closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate.◀ With navigation system: Speed Limit Info is not available. Overview

Camera Without navigation system: no speed limit or cancellation is de‐ tected.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

System limits The camera is installed near the interior mirror. The system may not be fully functional and Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ ror clean and clear. lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. Display ▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed Speed Limit Info is displayed via the Onboard by objects, stickers or paint. Computer.

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 100

CONTROLS Displays

▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in Activating a list and adjusting the front of you. setting ▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong Button on the steering Function reflections. wheel ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior Move selection up. mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc. Move selection down. ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. Confirm the selection. ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ Display tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle delivery. ▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected. Onboard Computer Selection lists Concept General information The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐ With the buttons on the steering wheel and the cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐ display in the instrument cluster the following age values. can be displayed or operated: Calling up information on the Info ▷ Current audio source. Display ▷ Redial phone feature. ▷ Turn on voice activation system.

Press and hold button on signal lever.

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 101

Displays CONTROLS

Information is displayed in the Info Display of 2. "Instrument cluster" the instrument cluster. 3. Select the desired information. Settings are stored for the profile currently Information at a glance used.

Info Display Information in detail Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up Range the following information in the Displays the estimated cruising range available Info Display: with the remaining fuel. ▷ Range. The range is calculated based on your driving ▷ GREEN Info. style over the last 20 miles/30 km. When GREEN Mode is activated. GREEN info ▷ Average consumption, fuel. The achieved range extension may be dis‐ ▷ Current consumption, fuel. played as a bonus range. ▷ Average speed. Average fuel consumption ▷ Date. This is calculated for the period while the en‐ ▷ Engine temperature display. gine is running. ▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐ The average fuel consumption is calculated for play and navigation: the distance traveled since the last reset by the Distance to destination. Onboard Computer. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. Average speed ▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐ Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the play and navigation: engine manually stopped are not included in Time of arrival. the calculation of the average speed. When destination guidance is activated in Resetting average values the navigation system. ▷ Speed Limit Info. ▷ Speed. The unit of some information can be changed. Setting units, refer to page 104.

Selecting information You can select what information from the On‐ board Computer is to be displayed on the Info Press and hold button on turn signal lever. Display of the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Settings"

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 102

CONTROLS Displays

Engine temperature display General information Displays the current engine temperature, based The vehicle features two types of Onboard on a combination of coolant and engine oil Computers. temperature. As soon as the optimum operat‐ ▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the ing temperature has been attained, the indica‐ fuel consumption, are displayed. The values tor is in the center position. can be reset individually. If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en‐ ▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐ gine, become too hot, a Check Control message view of a certain distance and can be reset is displayed too. as often as necessary. When the engine temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed. Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip computer When the engine oil temperature is too Via the Central Information Display (CID): high, a red indicator light is displayed. 1. "Vehicle info" Check the coolant level, refer to page 229. 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

With equipment version with Head-up Resetting the Onboard Computer Display and navigation: distance to Via the Central Information Display (CID): destination 1. "Vehicle info" The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ 2. "Onboard info" gation system before the trip is started. 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ 4. "Yes" tomatically. Resetting the trip computer With equipment version with Head-up Via the Central Information Display (CID): Display and navigation: time of arrival The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a 1. "Vehicle info" destination is entered in the navigation system 2. "Trip computer" before the trip is started. 3. "Reset": all values are reset. The time must be correctly set. "Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come Speed Limit Info to a standstill. Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster. Driving Excitement Onboard Computer on the Control Display Concept On the Control Display, sport instruments can Concept be displayed, and the vehicle state can be The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐ checked before the use of the SPORT program. cle data on the Control Display, such as average values.

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 103

Displays CONTROLS

Sport instruments Speed warning

General information Concept On the Control Display, values for power and A speed limit can be set that when reached will torque are displayed. cause a warning to be issued.

Displaying sport instruments General information Via the Central Information Display (CID): The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed 1. "Vehicle info" exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. 2. "Driving Excitement" 3. "Sports instruments" Displaying, setting or changing the Via MINI Driving Modes switch: speed warning 1. Activate SPORT. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "Driving Excitement" 1. "Settings" 3. "Sports instruments" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:" Vehicle state 4. Turn the Controller until the desired speed The following vehicle and surrounding area warning is displayed. data is automatically checked and evaluated in 5. Press the Controller. succession: ▷ Range. Activating/deactivating the speed ▷ Engine temperature. warning ▷ External temperature. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

▷ SPORT program state. 1. "Settings" Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is 2. "Speed" displayed. 3. "Warning" Checking vehicle state 4. Press the Controller. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Setting your current speed as the speed 1. "Vehicle info" warning 2. "Driving Excitement" Via the Central Information Display (CID):

3. "Vehicle and surroundings" 1. "Settings" Via MINI Driving Modes switch: 2. "Speed" 1. Activate SPORT. 3. "Select current speed" 2. "Driving Excitement" 4. Press the Controller. 3. "Vehicle and surroundings"

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 104

CONTROLS Displays

Settings on the Control 3. "Format:" Display 4. Select the desired format. The date format is stored. Time Language Setting the time Setting the language 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Time:" 3. "Language:" 4. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed. 4. Select the desired language. 5. Press the Controller. Settings are stored for the profile currently used. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐ nutes are displayed. Setting the voice dialog 7. Press the Controller. Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐ The time is stored. fer to page 29.

Setting the time format Units of measurement 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" Setting the units of measurement 3. "Format:" To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature: 4. Select the desired format. The time format is stored. 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" Date 3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. Setting the date Settings are stored for the profile currently 1. "Settings" used. 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Date:" Brightness 4. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed. Setting the brightness 5. Press the Controller. To set the brightness of the Control Display: 6. Make the settings for the month and year. 1. "Settings" The date is stored. 2. "Control display" 3. "Brightness at night" Setting the date format 4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ 1. "Settings" ness is set. 2. "Time/Date" 5. Press the Controller.

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 105

Displays CONTROLS

Settings are stored for the profile currently ▷ Arrow 1: current RPM. used. ▷ Arrow 2: prewarning field. Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ▷ Arrow 3: warning field. ness settings may not be clearly visible. Switching on/off LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID): LED ring on the central instrument cluster 1. "Settings" 2. "Center Instrument" Concept 3. "Center Instrument" The LED ring displays light animations to repre‐ sent specific functions. Adjusting the LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID): Basic displays 1. "Settings" Basic functions, for instance the tachometer, 2. "Center Instrument" can be set to be displayed continually if so de‐ sired. 3. "Basic display" or "Event display" 4. Select the desired setting. Event displays Functions that are only displayed temporarily, Setting the brightness for instance the volume or temperature set‐ The brightness can be adjusted when night tings, can be set as event displays. lighting is active in the instrument cluster. Several vehicle assistance functions can also be Via the Central Information Display (CID): displayed on the LED ring. This display corre‐ 1. "Settings" sponds with the displays of the function in the respective display. 2. "Center Instrument" 3. "Brightness at night" Example: tachometer 4. Turn the Controller. Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster, Settings are stored for the profile currently the light animations of the tachometer's basic used. display show the current RPMs and the respec‐ tive RPM warning thresholds.

Display Head-up Display Concept This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed. The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road.

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 106

CONTROLS Displays

General information Display Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head- up Display. For additional information, see the Overview chapter on care. The following information is displayed on the Head-up Display: Safety information ▷ Speed. WARNING ▷ Navigation system. When extending and retracting the pro‐ ▷ Check Control messages. jection screen of the Head-up Display, body ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the ▷ Driver assistance systems. projection screen is clear during opening and Some of this information is only displayed closing.◀ briefly as needed.

NOTE Selecting displays in the Head-up The Head-up Display consists of sensitive Display components that can easily be scraped or dam‐ Via the Central Information Display (CID): aged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place any objects on the Head-up Display, 1. "Settings" attach to system components or plug into the 2. "Head-Up Display" system. Do not move the moving parts man‐ 3. "Displayed information" ually.◀ 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display. Overview Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Settings" Switching the Head-up Display on/off 2. "Head-Up Display" When switching on, the projection lens of the 3. "Brightness" Head-up Display is extended. When switching 4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display ness is set. is retracted again. 5. Press the Controller. Via the Central Information Display (CID): When the low beams are switched on, the 1. "Settings" brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐ tionally influenced using the instrument light‐ 2. "Head-Up Display" ing, refer to page 113. 3. "Head-Up Display"

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 107

Displays CONTROLS

Settings are stored for the profile currently John Cooper Works: sport displays in used. the Head-up Display

Adjusting the height General information Via the Central Information Display (CID): The sport displays in the Head-up Display assist with a sporty driving style. 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" Switching on 3. "Height" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. Turn the Controller until the desired height 1. "Settings" is reached. 2. "Head-Up Display" 5. Press the Controller. 3. "Displayed information" Settings are stored for the profile currently used. 4. "Sport displays" With navigation system: if the sport displays are Setting the rotation switched on, no navigation content will be dis‐ The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐ played on the Head-up Display. tated around its own axis. Display Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Rotation" 4. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is selected. 5. Press the Controller. Settings are stored for the profile currently used. 1 Speed Display visibility 2 Shift point indicator The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐ 3 Gear display play is influenced by the following factors: 4 Current engine speed ▷ Certain sitting positions. 5 Warning field, speed ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ play. Shift point indicator ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. Concept ▷ Wet roads. Shift point indicator in the Head-up Display in‐ ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. dicates the optimum shifting point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle acceleration is achieved.

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 108

CONTROLS Displays

Functional requirements ▷ Steptronic Sport transmission: Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy‐ namic Traction Control DTC are activated. ▷ Press the accelerator pedal all the way down.

Display Successive gray illuminated fields indicate the upcoming shift moment. Shift up immediately when the red fields light up. When the permitted maximum speed is reached, all shift point indicators flash. When the maximum speed is exceeded, the supply of fuel is interrupted in order to protect the engine.

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 109

Lights CONTROLS

Lights

Vehicle features and op‐ Symbol Function tions Lights off. Daytime running lights. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Parking lights. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This Low beams. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be Instrument lighting. observed.

Overview Parking lights, low Switches in the vehicle beams and roadside parking lights

General information Position of switch: , , If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐ cally switched off.

The light switch element is located next to the Parking lights steering wheel. Position of switch: The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. Symbol Function Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ Rear fog light. ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐ charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. Front fog lights. When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐ side parking light, refer to page 110.

Automatic headlight control. Low beams Cornering light. Position of switch: The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on.

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 110

CONTROLS Lights

Canada: roadside parking light 3. "Welcome lights" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Concept rently used. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. Headlight courtesy delay feature Switching on General information The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the vehi‐ cle's radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance 3. "Pathway lighting:" point for approx. 2 seconds. 4. Set length of time. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Switching off rently used. Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction. Automatic headlight control Welcome lights and headlight courtesy de‐ Concept lay feature The low beams are switched on and off auto‐ matically depending on the ambient bright‐ ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if Welcome lights there is precipitation. General information General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and the A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can ambient brightness, individual light functions cause the lights to be switched on. may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked. Activating Activating/deactivating Position of switch: Position of switch: , The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐ luminated when the low beams are switched Via the Central Information Display (CID): on. 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting"

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 111

Lights CONTROLS

System limits The cornering light is automatically switched on The automatic headlight control cannot serve depending on the steering angle or the use of as a substitute for your personal judgment of turn signals. lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under Adaptive headlight these conditions, you should always switch on range control the lights manually. The adaptive headlight range control compen‐ sates for acceleration and braking operations in Daytime running lights order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve optimum illumination of the roadway. General information Position of switch: , , High-beam Assistant The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on. After the ignition is Concept switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐ The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic tion . participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depending Activating/deactivating on the traffic situation. In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ General information vate the daytime running lights. The assistant ensures that the high beams are Via the Central Information Display (CID): switched on, whenever the traffic situation al‐ 1. "Settings" lows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system. 2. "Lighting" The system responds to light from oncoming 3. "Daytime running lamps" traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐ adequate illumination, for instance in towns rently used. and cities. The high beams can be switched on and off at any time as usual. Cornering light

General information Position of switch: In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 112

CONTROLS Lights

Activating/deactivating ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.

Position of switch, depending on the vehicle Fog lights equipment: , Press and hold button on signal lever. Front fog lights

The indicator light in the instrument Concept cluster is illuminated when the low The front fog lights work alongside the low beams are switched on. beams to illuminate a wider area of the road‐ way. The headlights are automatically switched be‐ tween low beams and high beams. Functional requirement The blue indicator light in the instru‐ The low beams must be switched on before ment cluster lights up when the system switching on the front fog lights. switches on the high beams. Switching on/off The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, Press button. refer to page 75. The green indicator light lights up if To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the front fog lights are switched on. the button on the turn signal lever. If the automatic headlight control, refer to System limits page 110, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐ front fog lights. stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In situation that When the high beams or headlight flasher are require this, therefore switch off manually. activated, the front fog lights are not switched on. The system is not fully functional in the follow‐ ing situations, and driver intervention may be Rear fog light necessary: ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, Functional requirement such as fog or heavy precipitation. The low beams or the front fog lights must be ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such switched on before switching on the rear fog as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders light. and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 113

Lights CONTROLS

Switching on/off Overview Press button. The yellow indicator light lights up when the rear fog light is switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 110, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the rear fog light.

1 Interior lights Instrument lighting 2 Reading lights Functional requirement 3 Ambient light The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. Switching the interior lights on/off Press button. Settings Adjust the brightness with the To switch off permanently: press the button thumbwheel. and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and off manually Press button.

Interior lights The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light. General information Depending on the equipment, the interior Ambient light lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights are controlled automatically. General information Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting con‐ Depending on the equipment version, lighting trols brightness of some of these features. can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐ terior.

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Ambient:" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 114

CONTROLS Lights

Changing color Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

Press the switch forward or backward and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until the ambient light illuminates several times: au‐ tomatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness Depending on the equipment, the brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Brightness:" 4. Adjust the brightness.

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 115

Safety CONTROLS

Safety

Vehicle features and op‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This tions also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- tems. When using these functions and systems, specific and optional features offered with the the applicable laws and regulations must be series. It also describes features that are not observed.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag 3 Head airbag

Front airbags Side airbag Front airbags help protect the driver and the In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the front passenger by responding to frontal im‐ side of the body in the chest and lap area. pacts in which safety belts alone would not pro‐ vide adequate protection. Head airbag In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 116

CONTROLS Safety

Ejection Mitigation ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐ tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the tach adhesive labels or coverings and do likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants not attach brackets or cables, for instance through side windows during rollovers or side for GPS devices or mobile phones. impact events. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ bag cover panels, do not cover them or Knee airbag modify them in any way. The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on impact. the front passenger side as a storage area. ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or Protective action other objects on the front passenger seat Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ that are not specifically suited for seats with tion, for instance in less severe accidents or integrated side airbags. rear-end collisions. ▷ Do not place seat cushions or other objects on the front seats that are not specifically Information on optimum effect of the suited for seats with integrated side air‐ airbags bags. WARNING ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐ jackets, over the backrests. ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. tended and may cause additional injuries due This also applies to steering wheel covers, to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ the dashboard, and the seats. ger to life. Follow the information on achieving ▷ Do not remove the airbag system. the optimum protective effect of the airbag system.◀ Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags ▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the The ignition and inflation noise may lead to steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep ing impairment in sensitive occupants. the risk of injury to your hands or arms as Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐ low as possible when the airbag is trig‐ ties may affect the air bag system; contact MINI gered. Customer Relations for further information. ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting Warnings and information on the airbags are correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs also found on the sun visors. in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard. ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag. ▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐ mals or objects between an airbag and a person.

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 117

Safety CONTROLS

Functional readiness of the airbag General information system Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐ Safety information structions for children on the front passenger WARNING seat, see Children. Individual components can be hot after Safety information triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐ WARNING nents.◀ To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag function, the system must be able to detect WARNING whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐ Improperly executed work can lead to ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐ or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐ tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐ senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.◀ tended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag Malfunction of the automatic system checked, repaired, dismantled and deactivation system scrapped by a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.◀ When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐ tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, Correct function the indicator light for the front-seat passenger When the ignition is switched on, the airbags lights up. warning light in the instrument cluster In this case, change the sitting position so that lights up briefly and thereby indicates the front-seat passenger airbags are activated the operational readiness of the entire airbag and the indicator light goes out. system and the belt tensioner. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. Airbag system malfunctioning To enable correct recognition of the occupied ▷ Warning light does not come on when the seat cushion. ignition is switched on. ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or ▷ The warning light lights up continuously. other items to the front passenger seat un‐ less they are specifically determined to be Automatic deactivation of the front- safe for use on the front passenger seat. seat passenger airbags ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐ Concept tem is to be installed on it. The system reads if the front passenger seat is ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ could press against the seat from below. sistance. ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐ senger's side are activated or deactivated.

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 118

CONTROLS Safety

Indicator light for the front-seat Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbags passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver's/ front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐ pends on the positions of the driver's/front pas‐ senger seat. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control message is dis‐ played. A message also appears on the Control Display. The indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the Calibrating the front seats front-seat passenger airbags. WARNING The light indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ There is a risk of jamming when moving ther activated or deactivated. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ age to property. Make sure that the area of ▷ The indicator light lights up movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ when a child is properly justment.◀ seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is An appropriate Check Control message is dis‐ empty. The airbags on the played. front passenger side are not 1. Move the respective seat all the way for‐ activated. ward. ▷ The indicator light does not light up when, 2. Move the respective seat forward again. for instance a correctly seated person of The seat moves forward briefly. sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐ 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. tivated. The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disappears. Detected child restraint systems If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ The system generally detects children seated in peat the calibration. a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐ If the message does not disappear after a re‐ straint systems required by NHTSA at the point peat calibration, have the system checked as in time when the vehicle was manufactured. soon as possible. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected Tire Pressure Monitor and the front-seat passenger airbags are not TPM activated. Concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 119

Safety CONTROLS

there is a significant loss of pressure in one or All wheels green more tires. System is active and will issue a warning related to the tire inflation pressures stored during the General information last reset. Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐ tion pressure and, depending on the model, One to four yellow wheels the tire temperature. A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation With use of the system follow further informa‐ pressure has occurred in the indicated tires. tion found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 202. Gray wheels It may not be possible to identify tire pressure Functional requirements losses. The following conditions must be met for the Possible causes: system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of ▷ Malfunction. tire inflation pressure is not assured: ▷ The system is being reset. ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was performed with the correct tire infla‐ Additonal information tion pressure. The status control display additionally shows ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐ the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the justed to a new value, a reset was per‐ actual values read; they may vary depending formed. on driving style or weather conditions. ▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics. Resetting the system Status display Via the Central Information Display (CID):

Current status 1. "Vehicle info" The system status can be displayed on the Con‐ 2. "Vehicle status" trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is 3. "Perform reset" active. 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using 1. "Vehicle info" "Perform reset". 2. "Vehicle status" 6. Drive away. 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol‐ The current status is displayed. lowing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)…". Tire conditions After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the set tire inflation pressures are General information accepted as reference values. The resetting Tire and system status are indicated by the process is completed automatically while driv‐ color of the wheels and a SMS text message on ing. After successful completion of the reset, the Control Display. the tires appear in green on the Control Display and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is dis‐ played.

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 120

CONTROLS Safety

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When 2. Reset the system. you continue the reset resumes automatically. If the tire inflation pressure is too low Messages Message General information A yellow warning light is illuminated in A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC the instrument cluster. Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ Safety information sage appears on the Control Display. WARNING Symbol Possible cause A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ There is a tire inflation pressure loss. ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, No reset was performed for the sys‐ such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tem. The system issues a warning tires can maintain limited stability. There is a based on the tire inflation pressures risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if stored during the last reset. the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐ low the information on run-flat tires and con‐ tinued driving with these tires.◀ Measure 1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately. If a tire inflation pressure check is Do not exceed a speed of required 80 mph/130 km/h. 2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas Message station, check and correct the tire inflation A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ pressure in all four tires, if necessary. pears on the Control Display. 3. Reset the system.

Symbol Possible cause If there is a significant loss of tire The system has detected a wheel inflation pressure change, but no reset was done. No reset was performed for the sys‐ Message tem. The system issues a warning A yellow warning light is illuminated in based on the tire inflation pressures the instrument cluster. stored during the last reset. Inflation was not carried out accord‐ In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐ ing to specifications. pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐ trol Display. The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

Measure 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 121

Safety CONTROLS

Symbol Possible cause case, have the electronics checked and re‐ placed at the next opportunity. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. Run-flat tires No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning Safety information based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. WARNING Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐ Measure stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐ 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. duced, braking distances are longer and the Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ self-steering properties will change. There is a vers. risk of an accident. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of normal tires or run-flat tires. 50 mph/80 km/h.◀ Run-flat tires, refer to page 213, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the Maximum speed letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Actions in the event of a flat tire Continued driving with a flat tire Normal tires If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Identify the damaged tire. To do this, check the tire inflation pressure 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ in all four tires, for instance using the tire vers. pressure gage of a flat tire kit. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not tires at the next opportunity. have been reset. In this case, perform the If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is reset. correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is have been reset. In this case, perform the correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have reset. been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Possible driving range with a depressurized If identification of flat tire damage is not tire possible, please contact a dealer’s service The possible driving range varies depending on center or another qualified service center or the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., repair shop. speed, road conditions, external temperature. 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or The driving range may be less but may also be by changing the wheel. more if an economical driving style is used. Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐ ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 122

CONTROLS Safety

Vehicle handling with damaged tires is reported though tire inflation pressures are Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle correct. differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: Malfunction ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check ▷ Longer braking distances. Control message is displayed. It may ▷ Changed self-steering properties. not be possible to identify tire pressure losses. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering Examples and recommendations in the follow‐ maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐ ing situations: stance curbs or potholes. ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, for instance an emergency wheel, is mounted: Final tire failure have it checked by a dealer’s service center Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ or another qualified service center or repair cate the final failure of a tire. shop as needed. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of ▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐ dealer’s service center or another qualified dent. service center or repair shop. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s ▷ The system was unable to complete the re‐ service center or another qualified service cen‐ set. Perform a system reset again. ter or repair shop. ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ System limits ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again. Temperature The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS temperature. 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the Each tire, including the spare (if provided) tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire in‐ should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ flation pressure. flated to the inflation pressure recommended The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle tire temperature falls again. placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your These circumstances may cause a warning vehicle has tires of a different size than the size when temperatures fall very sharply. indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the Sudden tire pressure loss proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐ damage caused by external circumstances. tem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi‐ Failure to perform a reset cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the The system does not function properly if a reset low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 123

Safety CONTROLS

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the Functional requirements tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un‐ The following conditions must be met for the der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han‐ tire inflation pressure is not assured: dling and stopping ability. Please note that the ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐ TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte‐ ization was performed with the correct tire nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to inflation pressure. maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in‐ flation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐ ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐ mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. justed to a new value, an initialization was Your vehicle has also been equipped with a performed. TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS Status display malfunction indicator is combined with the low The current status of the flat tire monitor can tire pressure telltale. When the system detects be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐ active. mately one minute and then remain continu‐ Via the Central Information Display (CID): ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as 1. "Vehicle info" the malfunction exists. When the malfunction 2. "Vehicle status" indicator is illuminated, the system may not be 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐ tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐ The status is displayed. riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐ placement or alternate tires or wheels on the Initialization required vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning An initialization must be performed in the fol‐ properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction lowing situations: telltale after replacing one or more tires or ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐ adjusted. placement or alternate tires and wheels allow ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. the TPMS to continue to function properly. Performing initialization FTM Flat Tire Monitor When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming Concept the tire inflation pressures. The system detects tire inflation pressure loss Do not initialize the system when driving with on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ snow chains. tween the individual wheels while driving. Via the Central Information Display (CID): In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of 1. "Vehicle info" the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐ 2. "Vehicle status" ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire. 3. "Perform reset" The system does not measure the actual infla‐ 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. tion pressure in the tires.

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 124

CONTROLS Safety

5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset". Run-flat tires, refer to page 213, are la‐ 6. Drive away. beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. Actions in the event of a flat tire The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes. Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire. Messages To do this, check the tire inflation pressure General information in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control is switched on, if needed. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not Safety information have been reset. In this case, perform the reset. WARNING If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, been initialized. In this case, initialize the such as steering and braking response. Run-flat system. tires can maintain limited stability. There is a If identification of flat tire damage is not risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if possible, please contact a dealer’s service the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐ center or another qualified service center or low the information on run-flat tires and con‐ repair shop. tinued driving with these tires.◀ 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel. Indication of a flat tire Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, A yellow warning light is illuminated in may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this the instrument cluster. case, have the electronics checked and re‐ placed at the next opportunity. In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ sage appears on the Control Display. Run-flat tires Symbol Possible cause There is a flat tire or a major loss in Safety information tire inflation pressure. WARNING Your vehicle handles differently with a Measure run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐ stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐ 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. duced, braking distances are longer and the Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ self-steering properties will change. There is a vers. risk of an accident. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of normal tires or run-flat tires. 50 mph/80 km/h.◀

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 125

Safety CONTROLS

Maximum speed Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of You may continue driving with a damaged tire the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐ at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. dent. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s Continued driving with a flat tire service center or another qualified service cen‐ If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: ter or repair shop.

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ System limits vers. The system could be delayed or malfunction in 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. the following situations: 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four ▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in tires at the next opportunity. all four tires will not be recognized. There‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is fore, check the tire inflation pressure regu‐ correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have larly. been initialized. In this case, initialize the ▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐ system. ternal circumstances cannot be recognized in advance. Possible driving range with a depressurized ▷ When the system has not been initialized. tire ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road The possible driving range varies depending on surface. the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction The driving range may be less but may also be wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). more if an economical driving style is used. ▷ When driving with snow chains. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐ ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km. Intelligent Safety

Vehicle handling with damaged tires Concept Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle Intelligent Safety enables central operation of differently, potentially leading to conditions the driver assistance system. such as the following: The intelligent safety systems can help prevent ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. an imminent collision. ▷ Longer braking distances. ▷ Approach control warning with City light ▷ Changed self-steering properties. braking function, refer to page 126. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering ▷ Person warning with City light braking func‐ maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐ tion, refer to page 129. stance curbs or potholes. Safety information Final tire failure WARNING Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ The system does not relieve from per‐ cate the final failure of a tire. sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 126

CONTROLS Safety

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic ▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ is displayed. The systems are individually ate.◀ switched off according to their respective settings. WARNING ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective Indicators and warnings do not relieve to their individual settings. from personal responsibility. Due to system lim‐ Adjust as needed. The individual settings are its, warnings or reactions of the system may not stored for the driver profile currently in use. be output or they may be output too late, in‐ correctly, or without justification. There is a risk Press button again: of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are tervene where appropriate.◀ switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. WARNING Due to system limits, individual functions Hold down button: can malfunction during tow-starting/towing ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐ ▷ The LED goes out. gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/ towing.◀

Overview Approach control warn‐ ing with city light brak‐ Button in the vehicle ing function

Concept The system can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed. The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ nent collision and activates brakes independ‐ ently, if needed. The automatic braking intervention is done Intelligent Safety button with limited force and duration. A camera at the base of the interior mirror con‐ Switching on/off trols the system. Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ The approach control warning is available even cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐ if cruise control has been deactivated. gent Safety systems activate according to the With the vehicle approaching another vehicle last setting. intentionally, the approach control warning and Press button briefly: braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐ tem reactions.

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 127

Safety CONTROLS

General information There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐ The system warns at two levels of an imminent gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/ danger of collision at speeds from approx. towing.◀ 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving situation. Overview Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph/60 km/h. Button in the vehicle

Detection range

Intelligent Safety button

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account. Camera

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per‐ sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate.◀ The camera is installed near the interior mirror. WARNING Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ Indicators and warnings do not relieve ror clean and clear. from personal responsibility. Due to system lim‐ its, warnings or reactions of the system may not Switching on/off be output or they may be output too late, in‐ correctly, or without justification. There is a risk Switching on automatically of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic The system is automatically active after every conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ driving off. tervene where appropriate.◀

WARNING Switching on/off manually Due to system limits, individual functions Press button briefly: can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 128

CONTROLS Safety

▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system Symbol Measure is displayed. The systems are individually Symbol lights up red: prewarning. switched off according to their respective settings. Brake and increase distance. ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective Symbol flashes red and an acoustic to their individual settings. signal sounds: acute warning. Adjust as needed. The individual settings are Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ stored for the driver profile currently in use. ver, if necessary.

Press button again: Prewarning ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. This warning is issued, for instance when there is the impending danger of a collision or the ▷ The LED lights up green. distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Hold down button: The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning. ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Acute warning with braking function ▷ The LED goes out. Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐ nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ Setting the warning time proaches another object at a high differential The warning time can be set via the Central In‐ speed. formation Display (CID). The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is 1. "Settings" assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐ 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" vention in a possible risk of collision. 3. Activate the desired warning time on the Acute warnings can also be triggered without Control Display. previous forewarning. The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use. Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to react. During Warning with braking function a warning, the maximum braking force is used. Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently Display quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the A warning symbol appears in the instrument brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision system may assist with braking.When the vehi‐ with a detected vehicle is imminent. cle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐ vention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle stability has not been restricted, for instance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 129

Safety CONTROLS

The driver may cancel the braking intervention ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ gine via the Start/Stop button. tively moving the steering wheel. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ Object detection can be restricted. Follow the ately after vehicle delivery. limitations of the detection range and func‐ ▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐ tional restrictions. cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. System limits Warning sensitivity Safety information The more sensitive the warning settings are, WARNING the more warnings are displayed. Therefore, The system can react not at all, too late, there may also be an excess of premature or incorrectly, or without justification due to the unjustified warnings and reactions. system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information regarding the system limits and actively inter‐ Person warning with City vene, if needed.◀ light braking function

Detection range Concept The system's detection potential is limited. The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐ Thus, a system reaction might not come or destrians. might come late. When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐ E.g., the following situations may not be de‐ sue a warning if there is imminent danger of a tected: collision with pedestrians and includes a brak‐ ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach ing function. them at high speed. The camera at the base of the interior mirror ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of controls the system. you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. General information ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. With sufficient brightness, the system warns ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. about possible collision danger with pedes‐ trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐ Functional limitations prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking The system may not be fully functional in the before a collision. following situations: The system reacts to people who are within the ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. detection range of the system. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the windshield are dirty or covered. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 130

CONTROLS Safety

Detection range WARNING Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐ gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/ towing.◀

Overview

The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ Button in the vehicle ided into two areas: ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area. Intelligent Safety button

Safety information Camera WARNING The system does not relieve from per‐ sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate.◀

WARNING Indicators and warnings do not relieve The camera is installed near the interior mirror. from personal responsibility. Due to system lim‐ its, warnings or reactions of the system may not Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ be output or they may be output too late, in‐ ror clean and clear. correctly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic Switching on/off conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ tervene where appropriate.◀ Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving off.

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 131

Safety CONTROLS

Switching on/off manually Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐ vention up to a complete stop, the engine may Press button briefly: be shut down. ▷ The menu for the intelligent safety The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle system is displayed. The systems stability has not been restricted, for instance by are individually switched off ac‐ deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. cording to their respective settings. The driver may cancel the braking intervention ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ to their individual settings. tively moving the steering wheel. Adjust as needed. The individual settings are Object detection can be restricted. Follow the stored for the driver profile currently in use. limitations of the detection range and func‐ Press button again: tional restrictions. ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are System limits switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. Safety information

Hold down button: WARNING ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are The system can react not at all, too late, switched off. incorrectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk ▷ The LED goes out. of damage to property. Follow the information regarding the system limits and actively inter‐ Warning with braking function vene, if needed.◀

Display Detection range If a collision with a person detected in this way The detection potential of the camera is lim‐ is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the ited. instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐ The red symbol is displayed and a signal sued late. sounds. E.g., the following situations may not be de‐ Intervene immediately by braking or tected: make an evasive maneuver. ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such Braking intervention because of the viewing angle or contour. The warning prompts the driver to react. During ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. a warning, the maximum braking force is used. ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently 32 in/80 cm. quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the Functional limitations system may assist with braking.When the vehi‐ cle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may The system may not be fully functional or may come to a complete stop. not be available in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 132

CONTROLS Safety

▷ In tight curves. Alertness assistant ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the windshield are dirty or covered. Concept ▷ If the driving stability control systems are The system can detect decreasing alertness or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, gine via the Start/Stop button. it is recommended that the driver takes a break. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle delivery. Safety information ▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐ cause of oncoming light, for instance from WARNING the sun low in the sky. The system does not relieve from per‐ ▷ When it is dark outside. sonal responsibility to assess one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected in Brake force display time. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.◀ Concept Additional brake lights indicate emergency Function braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce the risk of a rear-end collision. The system is switched on each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. General information After travel has begun, the system monitors certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐ tected. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: ▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering behavior. ▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of trip. ▷ During normal brake application, the brake Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the lights light up. system is active and can display a recommen‐ ▷ During heavy brake application, the flash‐ dation to take a break. ers additionally light up. Break recommendation If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip.

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 133

Safety CONTROLS

After a break, another recommendation to take Interrupting automatic braking a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐ mately 45 minutes. ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐ sive maneuver. System limits Interrupt automatic braking: The function may be limited in the following sit‐ ▷ By pressing the brake pedal. uations, for instance and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all: ▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal. ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h. ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. ▷ In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. ▷ When the road surface is poor. ▷ In the event of strong side winds. The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways.

PostCrash – iBrake

Concept In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically with‐ out intervention by the driver in certain situa‐ tions. This can reduce the risk of a further colli‐ sion and the consequences thereof.

At standstill After coming to a halt, the brake is released au‐ tomatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

Harder vehicle braking It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐ tain situations to a halt quicker. To do this, for a short time the braking pressure applied when stepping on the brake pedal must be higher than the braking pressure ach‐ ieved by the automatic braking function. This interrupts automatic braking.

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 134

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and op‐ DSC Dynamic Stability tions Control This chapter describes all standard, country- Concept specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Within the physical limits, the system helps to necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐ to the selected options or country versions. This ing engine speed and by applying brakes to the also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ individual wheels. tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be General information observed. DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐ ditions, for instance: ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering. Anti-lock Braking System ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which ABS can lead to understeering. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to ABS prevents locking of the wheels during page 135, is a version of the DSC where for‐ braking. ward momentum is optimized. The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, thus increasing Safety information active safety. WARNING ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine. The system does not relieve from per‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐ Brake assistant not independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely automatically produces the greatest possible and actively intervene where appropriate.◀ braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ WARNING tance to a minimum during emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided When driving with roof load, for instance by the Antilock Brake System ABS. with roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may not be ensured in driving-critical situations Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal due to the elevated center of gravity. There is a for the duration of the emergency stop. risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driving with roof load.◀

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 135

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

Indicator/warning lights DTC Dynamic Traction The indicator light flashes: DSC controls Control the drive and braking forces. The indicator light lights up: DSC has Concept malfunctioned. DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability Control where forward momentum is opti‐ Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF mized. The system ensures maximum headway on General information special road conditions, for instance unplowed When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐ snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with duced during acceleration and when driving in somewhat limited vehicle stability. curves. When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐ To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again mum traction. Driving stability is limited during as soon as possible. acceleration and when driving in curves. Drive carefully. Deactivating DSC You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC Press and hold this button but not lon‐ under the following special circumstances: ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ snow-covered roads. strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. ▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or DSC is switched off. driving off from loose ground. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Activating DSC Press button. Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator light go out. Activating DTC Press button. Indicator/warning lights TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF in the instrument cluster. lights up. The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐ activated. Deactivating DTC Press button again. Automatic activation TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation light go out. occurs in the following situations: ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. ▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION or DSC OFF mode.

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 136

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

Performance Control Operating the programs Performance Control enhances the agility of the MINI Driving Modes switch Program vehicle. SPORT To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked MID individually when a sporty driving style is used. GREEN

Dynamic Damping Con‐ trol MID MID provides balanced tuning. Concept With each starting operation, MID is activated The tuning of the suspension can be changed using the Start/Stop button. with the system. GREEN The system offers several different programs. The programs are selected via the MINI Driving Concept Modes switch. GREEN, refer to page 190, provides consistent tuning to maximize range. Programs Activating GREEN MID/GREEN Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for until GREEN is displayed in the instrument clus‐ more comfort. ter. SPORT Configuring GREEN Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐ ers for greater driving agility. Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. Activate GREEN. MINI Driving Modes 2. "Configure GREEN" switch 3. Configure the program. This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is Concept activated.

The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine- Via Central Information Display (CID): tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose between three different programs. 1. "Settings" Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will ac‐ 2. "GREEN Mode" tivate the particular program. or 1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Configure GREEN"

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 137

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

Configure the program. Configuring driving program This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is Settings can be made for the following driving activated. programs in Driving mode: ▷ GREEN, refer to page 136. SPORT ▷ SPORT, refer to page 137. Concept Displays Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility. Program selection With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of Pressing the MINI Driving Modes the suspension also changes and SPORT can be switch displays a list of pro‐ individually configured. grams, which can be selected. The configuration is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Activating SPORT Selected program Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward The instrument cluster displays until SPORT is displayed in the instrument clus‐ the selected program. ter.

Configuring SPORT Depending on your vehicle's optional features, when the display is activated on the Control Display on the Central Information Display, the SPORT driving mode can be config‐ Display (CID) ured for individual specifications. Program changes can be displayed on the Cen‐ tral Information Display (CID). Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. "Settings" 1. Activate SPORT. 2. "Control display" 2. Select "Configure SPORT". 3. "Driving mode info" 3. Configure the program.

Via Central Information Display (CID): SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ Drive-off assistant vated: Concept 1. "Settings" This system supports driving off on uphill 2. "Driving mode" grades. The parking brake is not required. 3. "Configure SPORT" Driving off with the drive-off assistant This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is activated. 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐ out delay.

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 138

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steer‐ ing function. The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering more direct when driving at faster speeds. Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐ ing to the driving program, so that a direct, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 139

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and op‐ Safety information tions WARNING The system does not relieve from per‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ specific and optional features offered with the tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐ series. It also describes features that are not not independently react to all traffic situations. necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving to the selected options or country versions. This style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ and actively intervene where appropriate.◀ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be WARNING observed. The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐ justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the Camera-based cruise con‐ traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐ trol tively intervene where appropriate.◀ WARNING Concept Risk of accident due to too high speed Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐ differences to other vehicles, for instance in the tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using following situations: the buttons on the steering wheel. ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving ve‐ The system maintains the desired speed on hicle. clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle accel‐ erates or brakes automatically. ▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane. If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system ▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene The speed is adjusted as far as the given situa‐ where appropriate.◀ tion allows. The distance can be adjusted in several steps. Overview For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed. Buttons on the steering wheel

General information Button Function A camera on the interior mirror is used to de‐ Cruise control on/off, refer to tect vehicles driving ahead. page 140. Depending on the driving settings, the features Store/maintain speed, refer to of the cruise control can change in certain page 141. areas.

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 140

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Button Function Active cruise control is paused below approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to Pause cruise control, refer to a stop. page 140. Continue cruise control with the last Switching on/off and interrupting cruise setting, refer to page 141. control Reduce distance, refer to page 141. Switching on

Increase distance, refer to page 141. Press button on the steering wheel.

Increase speed, refer to page 141. Display in the instrument cluster lights up.

Reduce speed, refer to page 141. Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as de‐ sired speed and displayed with symbol. Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's ser‐ ies, optional features and country specifica‐ Cruise control is active and maintains the set tions. speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if Camera necessary.

Switching off Press button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually Press button on the steering wheel. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ ror clean and clear. Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the Functional requirements following situations: ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. Speed range ▷ Manual transmission: when the clutch The system is best used on well-constructed pedal is depressed for a few seconds or re‐ roads. leased while a gear is not engaged. The system is functional at speeds beginning at ▷ If selector lever position N is set. approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated The max. speed that can be set is or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐ 85 mph/140 km/h. vated.

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 141

Driving comfort CONTROLS

▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. Adjusting distance ▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐ paired, for instance by soiling, heavy pre‐ Safety information cipitation or glare effects from the sun. WARNING ▷ If the vehicle in front decelerates below a The system does not relieve from per‐ speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits, braking can be late. There is a risk of accidents Setting the speed or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance Maintaining/storing the speed to the traffic and weather conditions and main‐ Press or button in the interrupted state. tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by When the system is switched on, the current braking.◀ speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. Reduce distance The stored speed is displayed on the Press button repeatedly until the de‐ symbol. sired distance is set. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is The set distance is briefly displayed in switched on, if necessary. the left part of the instrument cluster. The speed can also be stored as follows: Press button. Increase distance Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired distance is set. Changing the speed or button: press until the desired speed The set distance is briefly displayed in is set. the left part of the instrument cluster. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the Continuing cruise control road is clear. ▷ or button: each time it is pressed to General information the point of resistance, the desired speed An interrupted cruise control can be continued increases or decreases by approx. by calling up the stored speed. 1 mph/1 km/h. Make sure that the difference between current ▷ or button: each time it is pressed speed and stored speed is not too large before past the resistance point, the desired speed calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐ changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. tentional braking or accelerating may occur. or button: hold down to repeat the ac‐ In the following cases, the stored speed value is tion. deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When the ignition is switched off.

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 142

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Calling up stored speed and distance ▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐ rupted, the display indicates the stored Press button with the system inter‐ speed. rupted. Cruise control is continued with the stored values. The selected distance is ▷ No display: system is switched off. briefly displayed in the Info Display. If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐ Switching distance control on/off rently fulfilled.

Safety information Distance to vehicle ahead of you WARNING Selected distance from the vehicle driving The system does not react to traffic driv‐ ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por‐ ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the tion of the Info Display. stored speed. There is a risk of accidents or risk Distance display of damage to property. Adjust the desired Distance 1 speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.◀ Distance 2 Switching distance control off Press and hold this button. Distance 3 Or: Press and hold this button. Distance 4 This value is set automatically after The indicator light in the instrument the system is switched on. cluster lights up. Detected vehicle To switch distance control back on, press one of the two buttons again briefly. Symbol lights up orange: After changing over distance control, a Check A vehicle has been detected ahead of Control message is displayed. you.

Displays in the instrument cluster Indicator/warning lights Desired speed and stored speed Symbol flashes orange: In addition to the indicator light, the de‐ The conditions are not adequate for the sired speed is displayed in the Info Dis‐ system to work. play. The system was deactivated but applies the ▷ Display lights up green: system is active, the brakes until you actively resume control by display indicates the desired speed. pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 143

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds: ▷ For oncoming traffic. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, ▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking if necessary. lighting at night.

The system has been interrupted or dis‐ Swerving vehicles tance control is temporarily suppressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.

Distance control is temporarily sup‐ pressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was de‐ tected.

Displays in the Head-up Display A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected The information from Active Cruise Control can until it is completely within the same lane as also be displayed in the Head-up Display. your vehicle. If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly System limits swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ Detection range tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐ lected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

Cornering The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the following situations: ▷ For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow- moving road users. If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ ▷ For red traffic lights. not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive ▷ For cross traffic. into a curve at an appropriate speed.

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 144

CONTROLS Driving comfort

The system has a limited detection range. Sit‐ Malfunction uations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐ driving ahead will not be detected or will be tem fails or was automatically deactivated. detected very late. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ When an object was not correctly detected. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the windshield are dirty or covered. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐ When you approach a curve the system may gine, via the Start/Stop button. briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates ately after vehicle delivery. you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independ‐ Cruise control ently. Concept Weather Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐ The following restrictions can occur under un‐ justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. favorable weather or light conditions: The system maintains the desired speed. The ▷ Poorer vehicle recognition. system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed. ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized. General information Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐ The system is functional at speeds beginning at ditions: approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. ▷ Wet conditions. Depending on the driving settings, the features ▷ Snowfall. of the cruise control can change in certain ▷ Slush. areas. ▷ Fog. Safety information ▷ Glare. WARNING Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ The system does not relieve from per‐ stance by braking, steering or evading. sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐ Engine power not independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving The desired speed may not be maintained on style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely uphill grades if engine power is insufficient. and actively intervene where appropriate.◀

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 145

Driving comfort CONTROLS

WARNING The current speed is adopted as the de‐ The use of the system can lead to an in‐ sired speed and is displayed with the creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐ symbol in the instrument cluster. tions, for instance: Cruise control is active and maintains the set ▷ On winding roads. speed. ▷ In heavy traffic. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet con‐ necessary. ditions, or on a loose road surface. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to Switching off property. Only use the system if driving at con‐ Press button on the steering wheel. stant speed is possible.◀ The displays go out. The stored desired speed is Overview deleted.

Buttons on the steering wheel Interrupting manually

Button Function When active, press the button on the steering wheel. Cruise control on/off, refer to page 145. Interrupting automatically Store speed, refer to page 145. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: Pause cruise control, refer to ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. page 145. ▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few Continue cruise control with the last seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ setting, refer to page 146. gaged. Increase speed, refer to page 145. ▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐ rent speed. Reduce speed, refer to page 145. ▷ If selector lever position N is set. ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐ Switching on/off and interrupting cruise vated. control ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.

Switching on Setting the speed Press button on the steering wheel. Maintaining/storing the speed Press or button in the interrupted state. The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 146

CONTROLS Driving comfort

The stored speed is displayed in the instrument The stored speed is reached again and main‐ cluster. tained. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Displays in the instrument cluster The speed can also be stored as follows: Indicator light Press button. Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ ped, the indicator light in the instru‐ ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ Changing the speed tem is switched on. or button: press until the desired speed is set. Desired speed and stored speed If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the The desired speed is displayed together road is clear. with the symbol. ▷ or button: each time it is pressed to ▷ Display lights up green: system is the point of resistance, the desired speed active, the display indicates the de‐ increases or decreases by approx. sired speed. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐ ▷ or button: each time it is pressed rupted, the display indicates the stored past the resistance point, the desired speed speed. changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ▷ No display: system is switched off. ▷ or button: pressing it to the resist‐ If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐ celerates the vehicle without requiring rently fulfilled. pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the System limits resistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐ erate more rapidly. Engine power The desired speed is also maintained downhill, Continuing cruise control but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient. General information An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. PDC Park Distance Con‐ Make sure that the difference between current trol speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐ Concept tentional braking or accelerating may occur. PDC is a support when parking. When you slowly approach an object in the rear - or also Calling up stored speed in the front of the vehicle if the feature is avail‐ Press button on the steering wheel. able - then the object is reported through:

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 147

Driving comfort CONTROLS

▷ Signal tones. Overview ▷ Visual display. With front PDC: button in vehicle General information The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐ tances are located in the bumpers. The maneuvering range, depending on obsta‐ cles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐ ing situations: ▷ By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from Park assistance button the object. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at ap‐ Ultrasound sensors prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object. Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, ▷ When a collision is imminent. for instance in the bumpers. Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ Functional requirements tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐ Ensure full functionality: ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐ stickers, bicycle racks. vene where appropriate.◀ ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. WARNING Switching on/off Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis‐ tance Control is activated, the warning can be Switching on automatically delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. The system switches on automatically in the Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid following situations: driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when is not yet active.◀ the engine is running. The rearview camera also switches on. ▷ With front PDC: when obstacles are de‐ tected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 148

CONTROLS Driving comfort

With front PDC: automatic activation on obsta‐ The signal tone is switched off, when selector cle detection can be switched off. Via the Cen‐ lever position P is engaged on vehicles with tral Information Display (CID): Steptronic transmission. 1. "Settings" Volume 2. "Parking" The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the 3. Select setting. entertainment volume can be adjusted. The setting is stored for the driver profile Via the Central Information Display (CID): currently used. 1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or Automatic deactivation during forward "Settings" travel 2. "Tone" The system switches off when a certain driving 3. "Volume settings" distance or speed is exceeded. 4. "PDC" Switch the system back on, if needed. 5. To adjust: turn the Controller. 6. To store: press the Controller. With front PDC: switching on/off manually Settings are stored for the profile currently used. Press park assistance button. Visual warning ▷ On: the LED lights up. The approach of the vehicle to an object can be ▷ Off: the LED goes out. shown on the Control Display. Objects that are The rearview camera image is displayed if the farther away are already displayed on the Con‐ reverse gear is engaged when pressing the trol Display before a signal sounds. park assistance button. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. WARNING The range of the sensors is represented in col‐ ors: red, green and yellow. Signal tones When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ When approaching an object, an intermittent played, the switch can be made to PDC: sound indicates the position of the object. E.g., if an object is detected to the left rear of the ve‐ "Rear view camera" hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. System limits The shorter the distance to the object, the Safety information shorter the intervals. WARNING If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is The system can react not at all, too late, sounded. incorrectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo‐ of damage to property. Follow the information cated both in front of and behind the vehicle, regarding the system limits and actively inter‐ an alternating continuous signal is sounded. vene, if needed.◀

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 149

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ In large buildings with right angles and Ultrasonic measuring might not function under smooth walls, for instance in underground the following circumstances: garages. ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ In automatic vehicle washes. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐ ▷ Due to heavy exhaust. stance coats. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐ ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ stance sweeping machines, high pressure sound, for instance from passing vehicles or steam cleaners or neon lights. loud machines. The malfunction is signaled by a continuous ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged tone alternating between the front and rear or out of position. speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no longer ▷ If cargo protrudes. present, the system is again fully functional. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch high relative humidity, wet conditions, off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detec‐ snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind. tion, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switch‐ ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other ing on/off. vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. Malfunction ▷ With moving objects. A Check Control message is displayed in the in‐ ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as strument cluster. ledges or cargo. Red symbol is displayed, and the range ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. dealer’s service center or another qualified ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance service center or repair shop. curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Rearview camera

False warnings Concept The system may issue a warning under the fol‐ The rearview camera provides assistance in lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐ parking and maneuvering backwards. The area stacle within the detection range: behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐ ▷ In heavy rain. play. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with Safety information ice. ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. WARNING ▷ On rough road surfaces. The system does not relieve from per‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 150

CONTROLS Driving comfort

ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and Automatic deactivation during forward vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐ travel vene where appropriate.◀ The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Overview Switch the system back on, if needed.

If the vehicle is equipped accordingly: If the vehicle is equipped accordingly: button in the vehicle switching on/off manually Press park assistance button.

▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button. Park assistance button Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID) Camera With PDC Park Distance Control activated: "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. ▷ The tailgate is fully closed. ▷ Keep the recording range of the camera The camera lens is located in the handle of the clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems tailgate. and trailers that are not connected to a The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐ necessary, clean the camera lens. tions.

Switching on/off Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac‐ Switching on automatically tive at the same time. The system is switched on automatically if se‐ ▷ Parking aid lines lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐ "Parking aid lines" gine is running. Lanes and turning radius are indicated. ▷ Obstacle marking

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 151

Driving comfort CONTROLS

"Obstacle marking" Obstacle marking If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, ob‐ stacles are highlighted.

Pathway lines

If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐ ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis‐ age of the rearview camera. tance Control. Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on Parking using pathway and turning level roads. radius lines Pathway lines depend on the current steering 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ angle and are continuously adjusted to the dius lines lead to within the limits of the steering wheel movements. parking space.

Turning radius lines

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding Turning radius lines can be superimposed on turning radius line. the image of the rearview camera. Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road. Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐ gle.

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 152

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Display settings Parking assistant

Brightness Concept With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting This system assists the driver in parking parallel is reached and press the Controller. to the road.

System limits General information Parking assistant handling is divided into three Detection of objects steps: Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects ▷ Switching on and activating. such as ledges may not be recognized by the ▷ Parking space search. system. ▷ Parking. If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, certain assistance functions also take into account data Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on from PDC Park Distance Control. both sides of the vehicle. Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐ The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐ trol chapter. ble parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure. The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. Therefore, do System status and instructions on required ac‐ not estimate the distance from the objects on tions are displayed on the Control Display. the display. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐ not independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.◀

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 153

Driving comfort CONTROLS

NOTE ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐ cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage For measuring parking spaces to property. Watch traffic closely and actively ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ intervene where appropriate.◀ prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. The safety information of the PDC Park Dis‐ ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ tance Control applies in addition. cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Overview Suitable parking space ▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min. Button in the vehicle length of 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking ▷ Doors and tailgate are closed. Park assistance button ▷ The parking brake is released. ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the Ultrasound sensors driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button Press park assistance button. The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking Parking assistant is activated automatically. spaces are located on the wheel housing. Switching on with reverse gear Functional requirements Shift into reverse. Ultrasound sensors The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Ensure full functionality: To activate: "Parking Assistant" ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers.

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 154

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Indicator on the Control Display Parking using the parking assistant

System activated/deactivated Parking

Symbol Meaning 1. Press the park assistance button or Gray: the system is not available. shift into reverse gear to switch on the parking assistant, refer to page 153. Acti‐ White: the system is available but not vate the parking assistant, if needed. activated. Parking assistant is activated. The system is activated. 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a Parking space search and system status distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the display, refer to page 154. 3. Follow the instructions on the display. The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move. The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ ▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of cated on the display. the vehicle image; the parking assistant is 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if activated and the parking space search is needed. active. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking Interrupting manually spaces at the edge of the road next to the The parking assistant can be interrupted at any vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant time: is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ lighted. ▷ Press park assistance button. ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ tive. Steering control has ▷ "Parking Assistant" been taken over by system. Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the ▷ Parking space search is always active following situations: whenever the vehicle is moving forward ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ takes over steering. activated. When the system is deactivated, ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the the displays on the Control Display are instruction on the display. shown in gray. ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 155

Driving comfort CONTROLS

▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel surfaces. roads. ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts ▷ On slippery ground. or the time taken for parking is exceeded. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the ▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays parking space. clearances that are too small. ▷ With a mounted emergency wheel. ▷ When switching into other functions of the ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge radio. of a port. A Check Control message is displayed. Limits of ultrasonic measurement Resuming Ultrasonic measuring might not function under An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ the following circumstances: tinued, if needed. ▷ For small children and animals. Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to ▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐ page 153, and follow the instructions on the stance coats. display. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ sound, for instance from passing vehicles or Switching off loud machines. The system can be switched off as follows: ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged ▷ Press park assistance button. or out of position. ▷ If cargo protrudes. ▷ Switching off the ignition. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as System limits high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind. Safety information ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. WARNING ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. The system can react not at all, too late, incorrectly, or without justification due to the ▷ With moving objects. system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as of damage to property. Follow the information ledges or cargo. regarding the system limits and actively inter‐ ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. vene, if needed.◀ ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. No parking assistance ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. The parking assistant does not offer assistance ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance in the following situations: curbs, can move into the blind area of the ▷ In tight curves. sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Functional limitations ▷ The parking assistant may identify parking The system may not be fully functional in the spaces that are not suitable for parking. following situations:

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 156

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Tire size The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 157

Climate control CONTROLS

Climate control

Vehicle features and op‐ Interior air quality tions The air quality inside the vehicle is improved by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter, and a This chapter describes all standard, country- climate-control system for regulating tempera‐ specific and optional features offered with the ture, air flow, and recirculated-air mode. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due In addition there are other functions which de‐ to the selected options or country versions. This pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic tems. When using these functions and systems, climate control, and parked-car ventilation. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings 5 Air conditioning 2 Air flow 6 Recirculated-air mode 3 Temperature 7 Rear window defroster 4 Seat heating, right 57 8 Windshield defroster

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 158

CONTROLS Climate control

9 Seat heating, left 57

Climate control functions in detail Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. Switching the system on/off The air conditioner produces condensation wa‐ ter, refer to page 187, that will exit from below Switching on the vehicle. Set any air flow. Recirculated-air mode Switching off Concept Turn the wheel for air flow all the way to the left. You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle. Temperature Operation Concept Press button repeatedly to select an The system heats or cools, depending on the operating mode: set temperature. ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. Settings ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ Turn the ring to set the desired nently blocked. temperature. To prevent window condensation, recirculated- air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐ tain amount of time, depending on the external temperature. Air conditioning With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the Concept fogging of the windows increases. The air in the car's interior will be cooled and If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated- dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐ air mode and increase the air flow, if needed. ture setting, warmed again. The car's interior can only be cooled with the Controlling the air flow manually engine running. Concept Switching on/off The air flow for climate control can be adjusted Press button. manually. The LED is illuminated with air condi‐ tioning switched on.

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 159

Climate control CONTROLS

Operation ▷ Direct the air distribution onto the win‐ dows. Turn the ring to set the desired air flow. ▷ Increasing the air flow. The higher the air flow, the more ▷ Increase the temperature. effective the heating or cooling ▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed. will be. Windshield defroster The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ duced automatically to save battery power. Press button. The LED lights up. The front window defroster switches Controlling the air distribution manually off automatically after a certain period of time.

Concept Rear window defroster The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually. Press button. The LED lights up. The rear window defroster switches off Operation automatically after a certain period of time.

Turn the wheel to select the de‐ When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out‐ sired program or the desired in‐ put is reduced. termediate setting. Microfilter In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐ ▷ Windows. crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air. ▷ Upper body region. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐ ▷ Floor area. nance, refer to page 231. ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation Make the following settings to defrost the win‐ dows and remove condensation:

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 160

CONTROLS Climate control

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left 9 Maximum cooling 2 Display 10 Air conditioning 3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 11 Recirculated-air mode 4 AUTO program 12 Rear window defroster 5 Air distribution, manual 13 Windshield defroster 6 Display 14 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐ 7 Temperature, right sation 8 Seat heating, right 57 15 Seat heating, left 57

Climate control functions in detail Switching off Turn wheel for air flow to the left Switching the system on/off until the control switches off.

Switching on Set any air flow.

Temperature

Concept The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 161

Climate control CONTROLS

by using the maximum cooling or heating General information power, and then keeps it constant. The function is available with external tempera‐ tures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the Settings engine running. Turn the ring to set the desired Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ temperature. gion. The vents need to be open for this. The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow active.

Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ Switching on/off perature settings. The automatic climate con‐ Press button. trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature. The LED is illuminated with the system switched on. Air conditioning The system is set to the lowest temperature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode. Concept The air in the car's interior will be cooled and AUTO program dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐ ture setting, warmed again. Concept The car's interior can only be cooled with the Air flow, air distribution and temperature are engine running. controlled automatically.

Switching on/off Switching on/off Press button. Press button. The LED is illuminated with air condi‐ The LED is illuminated with the AUTO tioning switched on. program switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO fog up briefly when the engine is started. intensity and outside influences, the air is di‐ The air conditioning is switched on automati‐ rected to the windshield, side windows, upper cally with the AUTO program. body, and into the floor area. When using the automatic climate control, con‐ The following features are switched on auto‐ densation water, refer to page 187, develops matically with the AUTO program: and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor‐ ▷ The air conditioning, refer to page 161. mal. To switch off the program: press the button Maximum cooling again or manually adjust the air distribution. Intensity Concept With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ The system is set to the lowest temperature, matic intensity control can be changed. maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 162

CONTROLS Climate control

Turn the ring to set the desired Operation intensity from soft to intensive. Turn the ring to set the desired air flow.

The set intensity is displayed via the position of the illuminated LED segment. The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments. Recirculated-air mode The air flow of the automatic climate control Concept may be reduced automatically to save battery power. You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ Controlling the air distribution manually rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the Concept vehicle. The air distribution for climate control can be Operation adjusted manually.

Press button repeatedly to select an Operation operating mode: Press button repeatedly to select a ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. program: ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ area. nently blocked. ▷ Upper body region and floor area. To prevent window condensation, recirculated- air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐ ▷ Floor area. tain amount of time, depending on the external ▷ Windows and floor area. temperature. ▷ Windows. With constant recirculated-air mode, the air ▷ Windows and upper body region. quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the ▷ Upper body region. fogging of the windows increases. If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated- Defrosting windows and removing air mode and increase the air flow, if needed. condensation

Controlling the air flow manually Concept Ice and condensation are quickly removed Concept from the windshield and the front side win‐ The air flow for climate control can be adjusted dows. manually. Switching on/off General information Press button. To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO program first.

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 163

Climate control CONTROLS

The LED is illuminated with the system If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air switched on. is directly routed into the car's interior. Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side win‐ Front ventilation dows.

The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow active. If there is window condensation, switch on the air conditioning too.

Windshield defroster Press button. The LED lights up. The front window defroster switches ▷ Turn knob for continuous opening and clos‐ off automatically after a certain period of time. ing of the vents. ▷ Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the Rear window defroster vent flow, arrows. Press button. The LED lights up. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. Parked-car ventilation

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out‐ Concept put is reduced. The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's interior and lowers its temperature, if needed. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐ General information crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, The parked-car ventilation can be switched on pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. and off directly or by using two preset activa‐ Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐ tion times. The system remains switched on for nance, refer to page 231. 30 minutes. The parked-car ventilation system is operated via the Central Information Display (CID). Ventilation Functional requirements Setting ▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready The air flow directions can be individually ad‐ state. justed: ▷ Direct operation or preset activation time: ▷ Direct ventilation: does not depend on external temperature. The air flow is directly pointed onto the per‐ ▷ Battery is sufficiently charged. son. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the depending on the adjusted temperature. vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, ▷ Indirect ventilation: limit the maximum activation time to save

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 164

CONTROLS Climate control

the vehicle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip. ▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. ▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate comf. ventilation" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the activation time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set the desired time.

Activating the activation time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol lights up when the activation time is acti‐ vated. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐ vated.

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 165

Interior equipment CONTROLS

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and op‐ during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held trans‐ tions mitter.◀ This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Compatibility series. It also describes features that are not If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐ to the selected options or country versions. This tem to be controlled, the system is gen‐ also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ erally compatible with the integrated Universal tems. When using these functions and systems, Remote Control. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. If you have any questions, please contact: ▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop. Integrated Universal Re‐ ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

mote Control HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. Concept The integrated Universal Remote Control in the Overview interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems, such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting systems. The integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To op‐ erate the remote control, the buttons on the in‐ terior mirror must be programmed with the de‐ sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. 1 LED Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security. 2 Programmable keys 3 Hand-held transmitters of the system Safety information WARNING Programming Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ ing remote-controlled systems, such as the ga‐ General information rage door, using the integrated Universal Re‐ 1. Switch on the ignition. mote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of 2. Initial setup: damage to property. Make sure that the area of Press and hold the two outer buttons on movement of the respective system is clear the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 166

CONTROLS Interior equipment

proximately 20 seconds until the LED on flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for the interior mirror flashes. This erases all 2 seconds, the system features a rolling code programming of the buttons on the interior radio system. Flashing and continuous illumina‐ mirror. tion of the LED will repeat for approximately 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ 20 seconds. tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system, ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the integrated Universal Remote Control and the interior mirror. The required distance the system also have to be synchronized. depends on the hand-held transmitter. Please read the owner's manual to find out 4. Simultaneously press and hold the button how to synchronize the system. of the desired function on the hand-held Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second transmitter and the button to be program‐ person. med on the interior mirror. The LED on the Synchronizing the universal remote control interior mirror will begin flashing slowly. with the system: 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system. rior mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior If the LED does not flash faster after at least mirror as described. 60 seconds, change the distance between 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button the interior mirror and the hand-held trans‐ on the system being programmed. You mitter and repeat the step. Several more have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. attempts at different distances may be nec‐ 4. Hold down the programmed button on the essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds attempts. and then release it. If necessary, repeat this Canada: if programming with the hand- step up to three times in order to finish syn‐ held transmitter was interrupted, hold chronization. Once synchronization is com‐ down the interior mirror button and repeat‐ plete, the programmed function will be car‐ edly press and release the hand-held trans‐ ried out. mitter button for 2 seconds. 6. To program other functions on other but‐ Reprogramming individual buttons tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Switch on the ignition. The systems can be controlled using the interior 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to mirror buttons. be programmed. 3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts Special feature of the rolling code flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐ wireless system mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐ If you are unable to operate the system after prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from repeated programming, please check if the sys‐ the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐ tem to be controlled features a rolling code quired distance depends on the hand-held radio system. transmitter. Read the system's owner's manual, or press the programmed button on the interior mirror lon‐ ger. If the LED on the interior mirror starts

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 167

Interior equipment CONTROLS

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the 20 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror desired function on the hand-held trans‐ flashes rapidly. All stored functions will be de‐ mitter. leted. The functions cannot be deleted individ‐ 5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior ually. mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the interior mirror has been programmed. Digital compass The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior mirror. Overview If the LED does not flash faster after at most 60 seconds, change the distance and re‐ peat the programming starting with step 4. Several more attempts at different distan‐ ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 sec‐ onds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeat‐ edly press and release the hand-held trans‐ 1 Control button mitter button for 2 seconds. 2 Mirror display Operation WARNING Mirror display The point of the compass is displayed in the Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ mirror when driving straight. ing remote-controlled systems, such as the ga‐ rage door, using the integrated Universal Re‐ mote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of Operating concept damage to property. Make sure that the area of Various functions can be called up by pressing movement of the respective system is clear the control button with a pointed object, such during programming and operation. Also follow as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. the safety information of the hand-held trans‐ The following setting options are displayed in mitter.◀ succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed: The system, such as the garage door, can be ▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. operated using the button on the interior mir‐ ror while the engine is running or when the ig‐ ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. nition is started. To do this, hold down the but‐ ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. ton within receiving range of the system until ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering the function is activated. The interior mirror setting. LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being transmitted. ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Deleting stored functions Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐ terior mirror simultaneously for approximately

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 168

CONTROLS Interior equipment

Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐ cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐ fer to World map with compass zones.

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure ▷ The point of the compass displayed does 1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ not change despite changing the direction prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set of travel. compass zone appears in the mirror. ▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed. 2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ trol button quickly and repeatedly until the Procedure number of the compass zone that corre‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic sponds with your location appears in the objects or overhead power lines near the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ drive around in a circle. pass is ready for use again after approximately 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. 10 seconds. 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on Calibrating the digital compass the display. Next, drive in a complete circle The digital compass must be calibrated in the at least once at a speed of no more than event of the following: 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, ▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 169

Interior equipment CONTROLS

Left/right-hand steering Ashtray The digital compass is already set for right or In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash‐ left-hand steering at the factory. tray from the cup holder.

Setting the language Cigarette lighter Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control but‐ Safety information ton again to switch between English "E" and WARNING German "O". Contact with the hot heating element or Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause mately 10 seconds. burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the respective objects. There is a risk of fire and Sun visor injuries. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the Glare shield cigarette lighter and burn themselves.◀ To provide protection against glare, fold the NOTE sun visor down or pivot it to the side. If metal objects fall into the socket, they Vanity mirror can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ socket cover again after using the socket.◀ hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting Operation switches on. Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be re‐ Ashtray/cigarette moved as soon as it pops back lighter out.

Overview Sockets

Concept The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the ignition is switched on or the engine is running.

General information The total load of all sockets must not exceed The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup 140 watts at 12 volts. holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐ center console. patible connectors.

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 170

CONTROLS Interior equipment

Safety information In the cargo area WARNING Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation de‐ vices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.◀

NOTE The socket is located on the right side in the Battery chargers for the vehicle battery cargo area. can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐ work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect bat‐ USB interface/AUX-IN port tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐ Concept ment.◀ Mobile devices with USB port can be connected to the USB interface. NOTE A mobile audio device, for instance a MP3 If metal objects fall into the socket, they player, can be connected using the AUX-IN can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of dam‐ port. age to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.◀ General information The following devices can be connected: In the center console ▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB inter‐ face. ▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance MP3 player. ▷ USB storage devices. Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats. Information about suitable USB storage devices can be found at www.miniusa.com/connectiv‐ Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. ity. The following applications are possible: ▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐ fer to page 46. ▷ Playing music files via USB audio. ▷ Adding music files to the music collection and storing the music collection.

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 171

Interior equipment CONTROLS

▷ Playing videos via USB video. ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device ▷ Loading of software updates. is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's Overview manual of the device. Not compatible USB media: ▷ USB hard drives. ▷ USB hubs. ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐ serts. ▷ HFS-formatted USB media. ▷ MTP devices. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps. The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐ cated in the center console.

Connecting an external device Follow the following when connecting: ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ nector into the USB interface. ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. ▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐ chanical damage. ▷ Due to the large number of USB media available on the market, it cannot be guar‐ anteed that every device is operable on the vehicle. ▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐ ronmental conditions, such as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual of the device. ▷ Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB storage device cannot be guaranteed in all cases. ▷ A connected USB storage device will be supplied with charging current via the USB interface if the device supports this. ▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket, when it is con‐ nected to the USB interface.

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 172

CONTROLS Storage compartments

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and op‐ ▷ Storage compartment in front of the cup holders. tions ▷ Clothes hooks This chapter describes all standard, country- ▷ Storage tray in the center console. specific and optional features offered with the ▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Glove compartment tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be Safety information observed. WARNING Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the Safety information glove compartment can be thrown into the WARNING car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ Loose objects or devices with a cable sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile close the glove compartment immediately after phones, can be thrown into the car's interior using it.◀ while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐ Opening jects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.◀

NOTE Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀

Overview Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches The following storage compartments are avail‐ on. able in the car's interior: ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side. Closing ▷ Compartments in the doors. Fold up the cover. ▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐ rest.

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 173

Storage compartments CONTROLS

Compartments in the Adjusting the height doors WARNING Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage Press button, arrow 1, and swing center arm‐ compartments.◀ rest upward or downward into the desired height, arrow 2.

Center armrest Cup holders General information The center armrest contains a storage compart‐ Safety information ment. WARNING Opening Unsuitable containers in the cup holder and hot beverages can damage the cup holder and increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ age to property. Use light-weight, unbreakable, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages. Do not force objects into the cup holder.◀

Front

Press button, arrow 1, and open center armrest upward, arrow 2.

In the center console.

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 174

CONTROLS Storage compartments

Rear WARNING Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.◀

For 3-door models: in front of the rear seats and in the side armrests.

For 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.

Clothes hooks

General information 3-door model: The clothes hooks are located above the side windows in the rear. 5-door model: The clothes hooks are located above the rear doors.

Safety information WARNING Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of an accident. When suspending clothing arti‐ cles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.◀

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 175

Cargo area CONTROLS

Cargo area

Vehicle features and op‐ WARNING tions Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in This chapter describes all standard, country- the event of an accident or during braking and specific and optional features offered with the evasive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be series. It also describes features that are not hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due and secure objects and cargo properly.◀ to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ NOTE tems. When using these functions and systems, Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be age. There is a risk of damage to property. observed. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀

Loading Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit Safety information 1. Locate the statement “The combined WARNING weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your High gross weight can overheat the tires, vehicle’s placard. damage them internally and cause a sudden drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐ 2. Determine the combined weight of the teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing driver and passengers that will be riding in lane stability, lengthening the braking distances your vehicle. and changing the steering response. There is a 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver risk of an accident. Pay attention to the permit‐ and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. ted load capacity of the tires and never exceed 4. The resulting figure equals the available the permitted gross weight.◀ amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount WARNING equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five Loose objects or devices with a cable 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile amount of available cargo and luggage phones, can be thrown into the car's interior load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ 150) = 650 lbs.) cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐ 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐ and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. jects or devices with a cable connection to the That weight may not safely exceed the vehicle in the car's interior.◀ available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 176

CONTROLS Cargo area

how this reduces the available cargo and ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of luggage load capacity of your vehicle. the backrests. ▷ Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet Load straps or draw straps. On 3-door models ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

On 5-door models

Without storage compartment package: to se‐ cure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, ar‐ row 1, in the cargo area. With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, arrows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of Attach load securing aids, such as lashing the occupants and the cargo. straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo The greater the weight of the occupants, the nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area. less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo Cargo cover ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. General information ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is ble, directly behind and at the bottom of raised. the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not Safety information occupied, secure each of the outer safety WARNING belts in the opposite buckle. Loose objects or devices with a cable ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile to stow cargo. phones, can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 177

Cargo area CONTROLS

cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐ Storage space under vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐ jects or devices with a cable connection to the cargo floor panel vehicle in the car's interior.◀

Removing For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed. 1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate. 2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right. Located under the cargo floor panel on the right side is a trough for the onboard vehicle tool kit. Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel up‐ ward to remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Enlarging the cargo area

Installing Concept 1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizontally The cargo area can be enlarged as follows: into the two side brackets until it audibly ▷ The rear seat backrests can be folded engages. down. 2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at ▷ The rear seat backrests can be moved into the tailgate. an upright loading position using the cargo setting.

General information The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat backrest is connected to the center section. The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear.

Safety information WARNING Danger of jamming with folding down the backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 178

CONTROLS Cargo area

movement of the rear backrest and the of the 2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the rear head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀ seat backrest forward, arrow 2.

WARNING If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse‐ cured cargo can be thrown into the car's inte‐ rior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.◀

WARNING With a rear backrest that is not locked, the protective function of the middle safety belt Cargo position is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety Concept belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.◀ The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position. WARNING The stability of the child restraint system Settings is limited or compromised with incorrect seat 1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward. adjustment or improper installation of the child 2. Fold the frame up until it engages. seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ straints or remove them.◀

WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving 3. Fold back and engage the rear seat back‐ the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. rest. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.◀ Fold back the backrest Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Folding down the rear seat backrest Make sure that the safety belt is not pinched. from the rear 1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded down, hook the corresponding safety belt into the belt buckle on the side.

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 179

Cargo area CONTROLS

Variable cargo area Lower position floor

Concept With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to trans‐ port requirements.

General information Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to ▷ Larger objects can be transported. page 175. ▷ Space for smaller objects remains between Removing the cargo floor panel the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Folded up position

Safety information WARNING Improper use of the variable cargo floor panel can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to On 5-door models: To change the position of property. the cargo floor panel, first fold up the rear part ▷ Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to of the cargo floor panel. separate the cargo area and car's interior in the sense of a partition net. ▷ Only use the variable cargo floor panel in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked. ▷ Fold down the variable cargo floor panel before driving off. ▷ Always secure cargo against shifting, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for in‐ stance.◀ Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward from the supports. The cargo floor panel can be removed from the cargo area above the tail lights.

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 180

CONTROLS Cargo area

Fold up the cargo floor panel

Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower posi‐ tion and push it behind the locks, arrow. You've reached the maximum cargo height.

Upper position

▷ With the backrests folded down, a long, flat loading surface is produced. ▷ For 3-door models: Maximum load in this position: 330 lbs/150 kg. ▷ For 5-door models: Maximum load in this position: 441 lbs/200 kg. ▷ Space for objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 181

Cargo area CONTROLS

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17

DRIVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 184

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and op‐ ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h. tions Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- stances. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not From 1,200 miles/2,000 km necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be to the selected options or country versions. This increased. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, Tires the applicable laws and regulations must be Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ observed. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Breaking-in period Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. General information Moving parts need to begin working together Brake system smoothly. Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full The following instructions will help you to ach‐ effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Drive moderately during this break-in period. During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, refer to page 89. Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal Safety information level only after a distance driven of approx. WARNING 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently. Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a Following part replacement delay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐ ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐ The same break-in procedures should be ob‐ servatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐ served if any of the components above-men‐ serve the break-in procedures of the respective tioned have to be renewed in the course of the parts and components.◀ vehicle's operating life.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 185

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

General driving notes Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Closing the tailgate WARNING Vehicle electronics and mobile phones Safety information can influence one another. There is radiation WARNING due to the transmission operations of mobile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐ age to property. If possible, in the car's interior cle and can endanger occupants and other traf‐ use only mobile phones with direct connections fic participants or damage the vehicle in the to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mu‐ event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐ tual interference and deflect the radiation from neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's interior.◀ the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.◀ Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can Driving with the tailgate open form between the tires and road surface. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ avoided: ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. surface, ultimately undermining your ability to ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. steer and brake the vehicle. ▷ Drive moderately. Driving through water Hot exhaust gas system WARNING General information When driving through water, follow the follow‐ During driving operation, high tempera‐ ing: tures can occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas system. ▷ Drive through calm water only. If combustible materials, such as leaves or ▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex‐ than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm. haust gas system, these materials can ignite. ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. property. Do not remove the heat shields in‐ stalled and never apply undercoating to them. Safety information Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driv‐ NOTE ing operation, idle or during parking. Do not When driving too quickly through too touch the hot exhaust gas system.◀ deep water, water can enter into the engine compartment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty. When driving through water, do not ex‐ ceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through wa‐ ter.◀

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 186

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

Braking safely Hills

General information General information The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the feature. gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐ Perform an emergency stop in situations that wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce require such. brake efficiency. Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid You can increase the engine's braking effect by any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐ shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if fort. needed. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from Safety information the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode. WARNING Light but consistent brake pressure can Objects in the area around the pedals lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out WARNING and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress Objects in the driver's floor area can limit on the brake system.◀ the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in WARNING the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐ In idle state or with the engine switched not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor off, safety-relevant functions, for instance en‐ mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can gine braking effect, braking force boost and be safely attached to the floor. Do not use steering assistance, are restricted or not availa‐ loose floor mats and do not layer several floor ble at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ drive in idle state or with the engine switched ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats off.◀ are securely fastened again after they were re‐ moved, for instance for cleaning.◀ Brake disc corrosion Driving in wet conditions Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐ tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐ When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, lowing circumstances: gently press the brake pedal every few miles. ▷ Low mileage. Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. corrosion. ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning In this way braking efficiency will be available agents. when you need it. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐ sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 187

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

Condensation water under the parked ▷ The roof load should not extend past the vehicle loading area. When using the automatic climate control, con‐ ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the densation water develops and collects under‐ bottom. neath the vehicle. ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using ratchet straps. Ground clearance ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening NOTE path of the tailgate. If ground clearance is insufficient, there ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐ might be contact with the front or rear spoiler, ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners for instance when driving over curbs or enter‐ gently. ing into underground vehicle parking garages. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance availa‐ Rear luggage rack ble.◀ General information Installation only possible with rear luggage rack Roof-mounted luggage preparation. rack Rear racks are available as special accessories.

General information Securing Installation only possible with roof rack. COOPER Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Loading Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. COOPER S Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐ tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐ roof. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 188

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

The fixing points, arrow 1, and the socket, ar‐ row 2, are located below the covers in the bumper. Remove the covers before installing the rear luggage rack.

Loading Because rear luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a ma‐ jor effect on vehicle handling and steering re‐ sponse. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved axle load and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐ tly.

Power consumption Before starting to drive, check the function of the rear luggage rack lights. The rear luggage rack lights must not consume more than: ▷ Turn signals: 42 watts per side. ▷ Rear lights: 50 watts per side. ▷ Brake lights: 84 watts in total. ▷ Rear fog lights: 42 watts in total. ▷ Backup light: 42 watts in total.

Driving on racetracks Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports competition.

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 189

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

Saving fuel

Vehicle features and op‐ Close the windows and tions glass sunroof This chapter describes all standard, country- Driving with the glass sunroof and windows specific and optional features offered with the open results in increased air resistance and series. It also describes features that are not raises fuel consumption. necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Tires tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be General information observed. Tires can affect fuel consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel General information consumption. The vehicle contains advanced technologies for Check the tire inflation pressure the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ regularly sion values. Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ pressure at least twice a month and before ferent factors. starting on a long trip. The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ ing style and regular maintenance can influ‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and ence fuel consumption and environmental im‐ tire wear. pact. Drive away without de‐ Remove unnecessary lay cargo Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while Additional weight increases fuel consumption. the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to Remove attached parts reach its operating temperature. following use Remove roof-mounted or rear luggage racks Look well ahead when which are no longer required following use. driving Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 190

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. Switch off any functions By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ that are not currently cle driving ahead of you. needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear Avoid high engine speeds window defroster require a lot of energy and Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐ consume additional fuel, especially in city and sumption and reduces wear. stop-and-go traffic. If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift in‐ Switch off these functions if they are not dicator, refer to page 98. needed.

Use coasting conditions Have maintenance car‐ ried out When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐ halt. ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐ MINI recommends that maintenance work be erator and let the vehicle roll. performed by a MINI service center. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer to page 231.

Switch off the engine GREEN Mode during longer stops Concept Switching off the engine GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves Switch off the engine during longer stops, for on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐ instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in gine control and comfort features, for instance traffic congestion. the climate control output, are adjusted. Auto Start/Stop function For Steptronic transmission: The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐ Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐ tomatically switches off the engine during a matically decoupled from the transmission in stop. the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐ tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐ If the engine is switched off and then restarted duce fuel consumption. The D selector lever rather than leaving the engine running con‐ position remains engaged. stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐ duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds In addition, context-sensitive instructions are of switching off the engine. displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐ sumption driving style. In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ mined by other factors, such as driving style, The achieved extended range is displayed in road conditions, maintenance or environmental the instrument cluster as bonus range. factors.

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 191

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

General information ▷ "GREEN climate control" The system includes the following MINIMALISM Settings are stored for the profile currently functions and MINIMALISM displays: used. ▷ GREEN bonus range, refer to page 191. GREEN Limit ▷ GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to page 192. ▷ Activate the GREEN Limit: ▷ GREEN climate control, refer to page 191. "GREEN speed warning": ▷ MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 194. A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded. ▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to page 193. ▷ Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit: "Tip at:" Activating GREEN Mode Select the desired speed. Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is GREEN climate control displayed in the instrument clus‐ Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. ter. That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's in‐ terior more slowly, to economize on fuel con‐ Configuring GREEN sumption. Via MINI Driving Modes switch The power output to the seat heater and exte‐ rior mirror is reduced. 1. Activating GREEN Mode. 2. "Configure GREEN" GREEN potential savings 3. Select the desired setting. Shows potential savings with the current set‐ tings in percentages. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Display in the instrument cluster 1. "Settings" 2. "GREEN Mode" GREEN bonus range 3. Select the desired setting. A modified driving style helps you extend your driving range. Or This may be displayed as the bo‐ 1. "Settings" nus range in the instrument clus‐ 2. "Driving mode" ter. 3. "Configure GREEN" The bonus range is shown in the range display. 4. Select the desired setting. The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled. Activating/deactivating the functions ▷ Green display: efficient driving style. The following functions can be activated/deac‐ tivated: ▷ Gray display: modify driving style, for in‐ stance by backing off the accelerator pedal. ▷ "GREEN speed warning"

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 192

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

Efficiency display GREEN tip, symbols A bar display in the instrument An additional symbol and text instructions are cluster indicates your current displayed. driving efficiency. Symbol Measure Mark in the left area, arrow 1: For an efficient driving style, look well display for energy recovered by ahead when driving, accelerate con‐ coasting or when braking. servatively, and delay accelerating. Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when accelerating. Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed. The efficiency of your driving style is shown by the position of the mark: Steptronic transmission: ▷ Mark inside the green range: efficient driv‐ Switch from M/S to D and avoid ing style. manual shift interventions. ▷ Mark outside the green range: modify driv‐ ing style, for example by backing off the ac‐ Manual transmission: celerator. Follow the shift instructions.

Manual transmission: GREEN tip, driving instruction Engage neutral for an engine stop.

Indications on the Control Display

Displaying MINIMALISM info The current efficiency of the functions in GREEN Mode can be displayed on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "Vehicle info" The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more fuel efficient, for 2. "MINIMALISM" example by backing off the accelerator. 3. "MINIMALISM info" Information is shown on the following func‐ Activating the efficiency display and tions: GREEN tips ▷ Auto Start/Stop function. The efficiency display and GREEN tips appear in ▷ Energy recovery. the instrument cluster when GREEN Info is acti‐ ▷ Climate control output. vated. ▷ Coasting. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Settings" Displaying GREEN tips 2. "Instrument cluster" "GREEN tips" 3. "GREEN Info" Driving instruction and an additional symbol are displayed.

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 193

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

Settings are stored for the profile currently ▷ With the route-ahead assistant: the system used. does not detect any obstructive traffic sit‐ uations or routes. Coasting Operation via shift paddles Concept The function helps to conserve fuel. Concept To do this, under certain conditions the engine Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ coasting mode can be influenced with the shift sion when selector lever position D is set. The paddles. vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector Activating/deactivating coasting via shift lever position D remains engaged. paddles This driving condition is referred to as coasting. 1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right shift paddle. As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator pedal, the engine is automatically coupled 2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the again. right shift paddle again. To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle. General information Coasting is a component of the GREEN driving Display mode. Display in the instrument cluster Coasting is automatically activated when the GREEN driving mode is called via the MINI Driv‐ The bar display below the tach‐ ing Modes switch, refer to page 136. ometer is filled in green and the A proactive driving style helps the driver to use mark appears at the zero point. the function often and supports the fuel-con‐ The tachometer shows the idle serving effect of coasting. speed.

Functional requirements Indications on the Control Display The function is available in the speed range The coasting driving condition is displayed in from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to MINIMALISM Info while driving. 100 mph/160 km/h. The distance traveled in the coasting driving ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not condition is indicated by a counter. operated. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ tion D. ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature. ▷ With a camera in the area of the interior mirror: the system does not detect any ve‐ hicles ahead of you.

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 194

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

The range of the vehicle can be extended by adopting an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the in‐ strument cluster and on the Control Display.

Functional requirement This function is available in GREEN Mode.

Calling up MINIMALISM Analyser Color code green, arrow 1: distance traveled in the coasting driving condition. Symbol, arrow 2: Via MINI Driving Modes switch coasting driving condition. 1. Activating GREEN Mode. 2. "MINIMALISM" Displaying MINIMALISM info 3. Select the symbol. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "MINIMALISM" Display on the Control Display 3. "MINIMALISM info"

System limits The function is not available if one of the fol‐ lowing conditions applies: ▷ DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated. ▷ Cruise control is activated. ▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range. ▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades. The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer con‐ ▷ The battery charge state is temporarily too sists of a fish in a water glass riding along on low. the roof of a MINI and a table of values. ▷ The vehicle electrical system is drawing ex‐ The fish and the movements of the water in the cessive current. bowl, arrow 1, symbolize the efficiency of the driving style. MINIMALISM analyzer The more efficient the driving style, the less the water sloshes around in the bowl and the bet‐ Concept ter is the fish's mood. If the driving style is inef‐ The function helps develop an especially effi‐ ficient, the water oscillates, the fish's mood cient driving style and to conserve fuel. worsens, and a reduced number of stars is dis‐ played. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories The table of values, arrow 2, contains stars and and is displayed on the Control Display. evaluates the driving style in different catego‐ ries. The more efficient the driving style, the This display will help you adjust your driving more stars are displayed in the table. style and save some fuel. The bonus range, arrow 3, achieved by a driv‐ The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated. ing style that minimizes fuel consumption is

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 195

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

displayed below the table of values. The more efficient the driving style, the faster the bonus range increases. To assist with an efficient driving style, GREEN tips are displayed while driving. Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving fuel, refer to page 189.

195 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17

MOVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 198

MOBILITY Refueling

Refueling

Vehicle features and op‐ Fuel cap tions Opening This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge specific and optional features offered with the and open it. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to page 200, prior to refueling.

Safety information NOTE With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached Refuel promptly.◀ to the fuel filler flap.

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 199

Refueling MOBILITY

Closing ment. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.◀ WARNING The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay attention that the re‐ taining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.◀ 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the following when refueling

General information When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐ pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: ▷ Premature switching off. ▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐ tion.

Safety information NOTE Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environ‐

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 200

MOBILITY Fuel

Fuel

Vehicle features and op‐ Safety information tions NOTE Do not press the Start/Stop button after This chapter describes all standard, country- refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the specific and optional features offered with the catalytic converter is permanently damaged. series. It also describes features that are not There is a risk of damage to property. Do not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due refuel or add the following in the case of gaso‐ to the selected options or country versions. This line engines: also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, ▷ Leaded gasoline. the applicable laws and regulations must be ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese observed. or iron. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐ ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ Fuel recommendation ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop.◀ General information NOTE Depending on the region, many gas stations Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐ sell fuel that has been customized to winter or tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage summer conditions. Fuel that is available in to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐ winter, for instance helps make a cold start eas‐ centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not ier. refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 Gasoline to M100.◀ NOTE General information Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐ For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should mum quality can compromise engine function be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. or cause engine damage. There is a risk of Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that taining metal must not be used. does not comply with the minimum quality.◀ Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of CAUTION 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐ ing. The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐ Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ ally, problems relating to drivability, starting dards: and stalling, especially under certain environ‐ US: ASTM 4806–xx mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐ CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx perature and high altitude, may occur. xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 201

Fuel MOBILITY

If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐ chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐ nance.◀

Recommended fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 91. John Cooper Works: MINI recommends AKI 93. Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 89. John Cooper Works: MINI recommends AKI 91. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 202

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and op‐ Tire inflation pressure specifications tions In the tire inflation pressure table This chapter describes all standard, country- The tire inflation pressure table, refer to specific and optional features offered with the page 204, contains all tire inflation pressure series. It also describes features that are not specifications for the specified tire sizes at the necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐ to the selected options or country versions. This sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle tems. When using these functions and systems, type. the applicable laws and regulations must be To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, observed. please note the following: ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. Tire inflation pressure ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. Checking the tire inflation pressure General information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ General information sure influence the following: Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation ▷ The service life of the tires. pressure increases with the tire temperature. ▷ Road safety. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐ ▷ Driving comfort. tion pressure. ▷ Fuel consumption. The displays of inflation devices may under- read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi. Safety information Checking using tire inflation pressure WARNING specifications in the tire inflation A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure table pressure may heat up significantly and sustain The tire inflation pressure specifications in the damage. This will have a negative impact on tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold aspects of handling, such as steering and brak‐ tires or tires at the same temperature as the ing response. There is a risk of an accident. ambient temperature. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month Only check the tire inflation pressure levels and before a long trip.◀ when the tires are cold, i.e.: ▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 203

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip. 1. Determine, refer to page 202, the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires. 2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example. 3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐ rent tire inflation pressure value deviates These pressure values can also be found on the from the specified value. tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door 4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed pillar. onto the tire valves. Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. After correcting the tire inflation pressure For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires. For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Checking the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel

Located behind the bumper on the underside of the vehicle is an opening for checking the tire inflation pressure.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 204, and adjust as necessary.

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 204

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure values up to On 3-door models: COOPER S 100 mph/160 km/h Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI On 3-door models: COOPER Specifications in Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI tires Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 195/55 R 16 87 H 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35 M+S RSC 195/55 R 16 87 V M 175/60 R 16 86 H 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35 +S A/S RSC M+S XL RSC 195/55 R 16 87 W 175/65 R 15 84 H RSC M+S A/S Std 175/60 R 16 86 H 2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35 175/65 R 15 88 H M+S XL RSC M+S XL Std 185/50 R 17 86 H 175/65 R 15 88 M+S XL RSC rear XL Std 205/45 R 17 88 V M 185/50 R 17 86 H +S XL A/S RSC M+S XL RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V M 195/55 R 16 87 H +S XL RSC M+S RSC 205/45 R 17 88 W 195/55 R 16 87 XL RSC V M+S A/S RSC 205/40 R 18 86 W 195/55 R 16 87 W XL RSC RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL A/S RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL RSC 205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC 205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

Emergency wheel Speed up to a max. of T 115/70 R 15 90 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 205

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER Tire size Pressure specifications in WORKS bar/PSI 205/45 R 17 88 V 2.5 / 36 2.4 / 35 Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI M+S XL A/S RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V Specifications in M+S XL RSC bar/PSI with cold tires 205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC

175/60 R 16 86 H 2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38 185/50 R 17 86 H 2.9 / 42 2.7 / 39 M+S XL RSC M+S XL RSC 205/40 R 18 86 W 205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC XL RSC 185/50 R 17 86 H 205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL RSC M+S XL A/S RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V Emergency wheel Speed up to a max. of M+S XL RSC T 115/70 R 15 90 50 mph / 80 km/h 205/40 R 18 86 W M 4.2 / 60 XL RSC

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

175/65 R 15 84 H 2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33 M+S A/S Std 175/65 R 15 88 H M+S XL Std 175/65 R 15 88 rear XL Std 195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC 195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC 195/55 R 16 87 W RSC

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 206

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

On 5-door models: COOPER S Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI On 3-door models: COOPER Specifications in bar/PSI with cold Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI tires Specifications in bar/PSI with cold 195/55 R 16 87 H 2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33 tires M+S RSC 195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC 175/65 R 15 84 H 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38 M+S A/S Std 195/55 R 16 87 W RSC 175/65 R 15 88 H M+S XL Std 175/60 R 16 86 H 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39 175/65 R 15 88 M+S XL RSC rear XL Std 205/45 R 17 88 V M 175/60 R 16 86 H +S XL A/S RSC M+S XL RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V M 185/50 R 17 86 H +S XL RSC M+S XL RSC 205/45 R 17 88 W 195/55 R 16 87 H XL RSC M+S RSC 185/50 R 17 86 H 195/55 R 16 87 M+S XL RSC V M+S A/S RSC 205/40 R 18 86 W 195/55 R 16 87 W XL RSC RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds M+S XL A/S RSC above 100 mph/160 km/h 205/45 R 17 88 V WARNING M+S XL RSC In order to drive at maximum speeds in 205/45 R 17 88 W excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, XL RSC and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for 205/40 R 18 86 W speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the XL RSC relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ Emergency wheel Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for op‐ T 115/70 R 15 90 timum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐ M 4.2 / 60 ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 206, and adjust as necessary.

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 207

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

On 3-door models: COOPER S On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER WORKS Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold Specifications in tires bar/PSI with cold tires

195/55 R 16 87 H 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38 M+S RSC 185/50 R 17 86 H 3.1 / 45 2.9 / 42 195/55 R 16 87 V M M+S XL RSC +S A/S RSC 205/45 R 17 88 W 195/55 R 16 87 W XL RSC RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL A/S RSC 175/60 R 16 86 H 3.1 / 45 2.9 / 42 M+S XL RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL RSC 185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC 205/40 R 18 86 W 3.4 / 49 3.2 / 46 205/45 R 17 88 V M XL RSC +S XL A/S RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC 205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC 205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 208

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

On 5-door models: COOPER On 5-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI bar/PSI Specifications in Specifications in bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold tires tires

175/65 R 15 84 H 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38 195/55 R 16 87 H 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 M+S A/S Std M+S RSC 175/65 R 15 88 H 195/55 R 16 87 V M M+S XL Std +S A/S RSC 175/65 R 15 88 195/55 R 16 87 W rear XL Std RSC

195/55 R 16 87 H 175/60 R 16 86 H 3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45 M+S RSC M+S XL RSC 195/55 R 16 87 205/45 R 17 88 V M V M+S A/S RSC +S XL A/S RSC 195/55 R 16 87 W 205/45 R 17 88 V M RSC +S XL RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V 205/45 R 17 88 W M+S XL A/S RSC XL RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V 185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC M+S XL RSC 205/45 R 17 88 W 205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC XL RSC 175/60 R 16 86 H 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 M+S XL RSC 185/50 R 17 86 H Tire identification marks M+S XL RSC 205/40 R 18 86 W Tire size XL RSC 205/45 R 17 84 V Emergency wheel Speed up to a max. of 205: nominal width in mm T 115/70 R 15 90 50 mph / 80 km/h 45: aspect ratio in % M 4.2 / 60 R: radial tire code 17: rim diameter in inches 84: load rating, not for ZR tires V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 209

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Maximum tire load Uniform Tire Quality Grading Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible Quality grades can be found where applicable weight for which the tire is approved. on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐ and maximum section width. wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature on the certification label on the driver’s door A pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross DOT Quality Grades Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear Treadwear GAWR and tire loads, respectively. Traction AA A B C Speed letter Temperature A B C Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to R = 106 mph/170 km/h these grades. S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h Treadwear H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h The treadwear grade is a comparative rating V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. Tire Identification Number The relative performance of tires depends upon DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3817 the actual conditions of their use, however, and xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices xxx: tire size and tire design and differences in road characteristics and cli‐ 3817: tire age mate. Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are Tire age AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop Recommendation on wet pavement as measured under control‐ Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at led conditions on specified government test least every 6 years. surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Manufacture date The traction grade assigned to this tire is based You can find the manufacture date of the tire on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and on the tire's sidewall. does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐ Designation Manufacture date droplaning, or peak traction characteristics. DOT … 3817 38th week, 2017

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 210

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Temperature Winter tires The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, Do not drive with a tire tread of less than and C, representing the tire's resistance to the 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for generation of heat and its ability to dissipate winter operation. heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Minimum tread depth Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger ve‐ hicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ quired by law. Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's WARNING circumference and have the legally required The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm. tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ The positions of the wear indicators are marked tion, or excessive loading, either separately or on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indi‐ in combination, can cause heat buildup and cator. possible tire failure.◀

RSC – Run-flat tires Tire damage Run-flat tires, refer to page 213, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters General information RSC marked on the sidewall. Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. M+S Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, Winter and all-season tires with better cold as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can weather performance than summer tires. cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐ pension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning Tire tread between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐ pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low- Summer tires profile tires. Do not drive with a tire tread of less than Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐ 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased functions: risk of hydroplaning. ▷ Unusual vibrations. ▷ Unusual tire or running noises.

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 211

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ Wheel and tire combination dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by the following situa‐ General information tions, for instance: You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐ ▷ Driving over curbs. other qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combination and ▷ Road damage. wheel rim versions for the vehicle. ▷ Tire inflation pressure too low. ▷ Vehicle overloading. Safety information ▷ Incorrect tire storage. WARNING Wheels and tires which are not suitable Safety information for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐ WARNING cle, for instance due to contact with the body Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐ due to tolerances despite the same official size sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manu‐ There is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is facturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that suspected while driving, immediately reduce you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐ speed and stop. Have wheels and tires ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the your vehicle type.◀ nearest dealer’s service center or another WARNING qualified service center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will repair damaged tires, but have them re‐ have a negative impact on the vehicle's han‐ placed.◀ dling and on the function of a variety of sys‐ tems, such as ABS or DSC. There is a risk of an WARNING accident. To maintain good handling and vehi‐ Tires can become damaged by driving cle response, use only tires with a single tread over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at configuration from a single manufacturer. The high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐ the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for danger of accidents and property damage. If your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have possible, drive around obstacles, or drive over the original wheel/tire combination remounted them slowly and carefully.◀ on the vehicle as soon as possible.◀

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 212

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Recommended tire brands Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop. With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐ Run-flat tires cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire If you are already using run-flat tires, for your brands can be identified by a star on the tire own safety you should replace them only with sidewall. the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐ ble from a dealer’s service center or another New tires qualified service center or repair shop. Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; Rotating wheels between axles they achieve their full traction potential after a Different wear patterns can occur on the front break-in time. and rear axles depending on individual driving Drive conservatively for the first conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐ 200 miles/300 km. tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further information is available from a dealer’s service Retreaded tires center or another qualified service center or re‐ WARNING pair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed. Retreaded tires can have different tire casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐ Storing tires ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does Air pressure not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀ Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. ommend the use of retreaded tires. Storage Winter tires Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark Winter tires are recommended for operating on place. winter roads. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide grease, and solvents. better winter traction than summer tires, they Do not leave tires in plastic bags. usually do not provide the same level of per‐ formance as winter tires. Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 213

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Run-flat tires Repairing a flat tire

Concept Safety measures Run-flat tires permit continued driving under ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible restricted conditions even in the event of a from passing traffic and on solid ground. complete loss of tire inflation pressure. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by General information setting the parking brake. The wheels are composed of tires that are self- ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front supporting to a limited degree. wheels are in the straight-ahead position The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐ and engage the steering wheel lock. main drivable to a restricted degree in the ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐ Follow the instructions for continued driving side the immediate area in a safe place, with a flat tire. such as behind a guardrail. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an Safety information appropriate distance. WARNING Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐ Mobility System stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐ duced, braking distances are longer and the Concept self-steering properties will change. There is a With the Mobility System, minor tire damage risk of an accident. can be sealed temporarily to enable continued Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped 50 mph/80 km/h.◀ into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside. Label General information ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐ lity System found on the compressor and sealant container. ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more. ▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with tire cannot be made drivable. RSC Run-flat System Component. ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire.

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 214

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant 3 Inflation pressure dial container and apply it to the steering 4 Reduce inflation pressure wheel. 5 On/off switch ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the 6 Compressor TPM wheel electronics replaced at the next 7 Connector/cable for socket opportunity. 8 Connection hose ▷ The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure. Safety measures Overview ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. Storage ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. The Mobility System is located under the cargo ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by floor panel. setting the parking brake. ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front Sealant container wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐ side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant ▷ Sealant container, arrow 1. ▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. Safety information Observe use-by date on the sealant container. DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐ Compressor tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ tain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accu‐ mulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.◀

NOTE The compressor can overheat during ex‐ tended operation. There is a risk of damage to 1 Sealant container unlocking property. Do not run the compressor for more 2 Holder for sealant container than 10 minutes.◀

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 215

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Filling 4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐ 1. Shake the sealant container. tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the 5. With the compressor switched off, insert hose. the plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.

3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it 6. With the ignition switched on or the engine engages audibly. running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐ tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 216

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Checking and adjusting the tire 4. Insert the connector into the power socket inflation pressure inside the vehicle.

Checking 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage. To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant container 5. With the ignition switched on or the engine 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ running, switch on the compressor. tainer from the tire valve. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar 2. Press the red unlocking device. cannot be reached, contact your dealer’s service center or another qualified service 3. Remove the sealant container from the center or repair shop. compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is 4. Wrap and store the sealant container in reached, see Minimum tire inflation pres‐ suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo sure is reached. area. 6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ Minimum tire inflation pressure is not pressor from the tire valve. reached 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket 1. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle. inside the vehicle. 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐ tribute the sealant in the tire. Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached 3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ pressor from the tire valve. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 217

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Adjustment Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer 1. Stop at a suitable location. to page 118. 2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant sor directly onto the tire valve stem. container of the Mobility System at the next op‐ portunity.

Snow chains

Safety information WARNING With the mounting of snow chains on un‐ suitable tires, the snow chains can come into 3. Insert the connector into the power socket contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐ inside the vehicle. cidents or risk of damage to property. Only mount snow chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of snow chains.◀

WARNING Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam‐ age tires and vehicle components. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐ ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least to the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ 2.0 bar. tions.◀ ▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ignition switched on or the engine run‐ Fine-link snow chains ning, switch on the compressor. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends ▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of button on the compressor. fine-link snow chains have been tested by the 5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended pressor from the tire valve. as road-safe and suitable. 6. Pull the connector out of the power socket Information regarding suitable snow chains is inside the vehicle. available from a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop. 7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. Use Continuing the trip Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed with the tires of the following size: of 50 mph/80 km/h. ▷ 175/65 R 15. Reinitialize the run-flat tires, refer to page 123. ▷ 175/60 R 16.

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 218

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

▷ 185/50 R 17. DANGER John Cooper Works: Supports such as wooden blocks under 185/50 R 17. the vehicle jack may prevent it from achieving its load capacity due to its restricted height. The Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ load capacity of the wooden blocks may be ex‐ tions. ceeded, causing the vehicle to tip over. There is Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mount‐ a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place ing snow chains, as doing so may result in in‐ supports under the vehicle jack.◀ correct readings. Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐ WARNING ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐ The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac‐ sult in incorrect readings. turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel When driving with snow chains, briefly activate change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed. not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using Maximum speed with snow chains the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h and risk of damage to property. Only use the when using snow chains. jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.◀ Changing wheels/tires WARNING On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for General information example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possi‐ wheel does not always need to be changed im‐ ble, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip- mediately when there is a loss of tire inflation resistant surface.◀ pressure due to a flat tire. WARNING If needed, the tools for changing wheels are The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting available as accessories from a dealer’s service the vehicle and for the jacking points on the ve‐ center or another qualified service center or re‐ hicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift pair shop. any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.◀ Safety information DANGER WARNING The vehicle jack is only provided for If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐ changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐ hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐ slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐ raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not serted in the jacking point next to the wheel start the engine.◀ housing.◀

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 219

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

WARNING objects, for instance a rock, under the wheels A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack of both the front and rear axles against the roll‐ may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐ ing direction. erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, Lug bolt lock do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel re‐ Concept moved by a dealer’s service center or another The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The qualified service center or repair shop.◀ lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding. Securing the vehicle against rolling Overview General information The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in the The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐ onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 233. tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1. ▷ Adapter, arrow 2.

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in Unscrewing front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. the wheel to be changed. 2. Unscrew the lug bolt. 3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the On a slight downhill gradient lug bolt.

Screwing on 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐ sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug bolt. 2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening tor‐ que is 140 Nm. 3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screwing on the lug bolt. If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suitable

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 220

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Preparing the vehicle do not change this position while using the ve‐ ▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip hicle jack.◀ ground at a safe distance from traffic. 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or ▷ Set the parking brake. lever with your other hand, arrow 2. ▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P. ▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐ side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. ▷ Depending on the equipment version, get tools and the emergency wheel from the vehicle. 2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or wheel to be changed. portable hazard warning light at an appro‐ priate distance. ▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐ ing. ▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehi‐ cle jack crank or lever clockwise.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ cated at the marked positions.

Jacking up the vehicle WARNING 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load Hands and fingers can be jammed when and continue turning the vehicle jack crank using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. or lever with one hand. Comply with the described hand position and

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 221

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and vertically and at a right angle beneath the tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐ jacking point. tern. 5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclock‐ wise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se‐ curely.

After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐ ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm. 6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo vertically and perpendicularly beneath the area, if necessary. jacking point after extending the vehicle The nonworking wheel cannot be stored jack. under the cargo floor panel because of its size. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ portunity and correct as needed. 4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench. 6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the 7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire nearest dealer’s service center or another surface of the jack is in contact with the qualified service center or repair shop. ground and the wheel in question is raised a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the ground. Emergency wheel

Mounting a wheel Concept Mount one emergency wheel only, as required. In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel 1. Unscrew the lug bolts. can be used in place of the wheel with the de‐ fective tire. The emergency wheel is only in‐ 2. Remove the wheel. tended for temporary use until the defective 3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on tire/wheel has been replaced. and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight. General information If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐ Mount one emergency wheel only. hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐ Also check the tire inflation pressure of the companying lug bolts may have to be used emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, as well. and correct it as needed.

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 222

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Safety information 3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread and hold in place with one hand. WARNING The emergency wheel has particular di‐ mensions. When driving with an emergency wheel, changed driving properties may occur, for instance reduced lane stability when brak‐ ing, longer braking distance, and changed self- steering properties in the limit area. There is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.◀

Overview 4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emer‐ gency wheel well using the hexagon at‐ The emergency wheel is housed in a well on tached to retaining plate. the underbody of the vehicle. The screw con‐ nection of the emergency wheel is under the cargo floor panel, on the floor of the storage compartment for the onboard vehicle tool kit. The wheel change tools are under the cargo floor panel.

Removing the emergency wheel 1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench from the onboard vehicle tool kit. 5. Lower the emergency wheel with the wheel wrench. 6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench 7. Pull out the well with emergency wheel un‐ der the vehicle toward the rear. 8. Remove the spacer and emergency wheel from the well. 9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.

2. Remove the retaining plate. Replacing the tires 1. Have the damaged tire replaced. 2. Replace the emergency wheel with the new wheel.

Installing the emergency wheel Have the emergency wheel installed back into the vehicle by a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 223

Engine compartment MOBILITY

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and op‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This tions also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- tems. When using these functions and systems, specific and optional features offered with the the applicable laws and regulations must be series. It also describes features that are not observed.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Filler neck for washer fluid 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal 2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative terminal 3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir

Hood personal and property damage. The manufac‐ turer of your vehicle recommends that, in the Safety information effort to avoid such risks, work in the engine compartment be performed by a dealer’s serv‐ WARNING ice center or another qualified service center or Improperly executed work in the engine repair shop.◀ compartment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 224

MOBILITY Engine compartment

WARNING Hood is unlocked. The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radia‐ tor fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀

WARNING There are protruding parts, for instance 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There again, arrow 2. is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐ tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these Hood can be opened. areas.◀ Indicator/warning lights WARNING When the hood is opened, a Check Control An incorrectly locked hood can open message is displayed. while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐ Closing the hood rectly close the hood.◀

WARNING Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀

NOTE Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of Let the hood fall from approx. 16 inches/40 cm, damage to property. Make sure that the wipers arrow. with the wiper blades mounted are folded The hood must engage on both sides. down onto the windshield before opening the hood.◀

NOTE When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property. Open the hood again and then close it energet‐ ically. Avoid pressing again.◀

Opening the hood 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 225

Engine oil MOBILITY

Engine oil

Vehicle features and op‐ NOTE tions Too much engine oil can damage the en‐ gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of This chapter describes all standard, country- damage to property. Do not add too much en‐ specific and optional features offered with the gine oil. When too much engine oil is added, series. It also describes features that are not have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due service center or another qualified service cen‐ to the selected options or country versions. This ter or repair shop.◀ also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be Electronic oil measure‐ observed. ment

General information General information The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ The engine oil consumption is dependent on uring principles: your driving style and driving conditions. ▷ Monitoring. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level ▷ Detailed measurement. after refueling by taking a detailed measure‐ ment. When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for instance The engine oil consumption can increase in the when taking curves aggressively, regularly per‐ following situations, for example: form a detailed measurement. ▷ Sporty driving style. ▷ Break-in of the engine. Monitoring ▷ Idling of the engine. Concept ▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐ fied as not suitable. The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the Control Different Check Control messages appear, de‐ Display. pending on the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is Safety information displayed. NOTE Functional requirements An engine oil level that is too low causes A current measured value is available after ap‐ engine damage. There is a risk of damage to prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. property. Immediately add engine oil.◀

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 226

MOBILITY Engine oil

Displaying the engine oil level Performing a detailed measurement Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "Vehicle info" 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" 3. "Measure engine oil level" The engine oil level is displayed. 4. "Start measurement" The engine oil level is checked and displayed System limits via a scale. When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value. In this Adding engine oil case, the measured value for the last, suffi‐ ciently long trip is displayed. General information Detailed measurement Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The quantity Concept to be added is indicated in the message dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The engine oil level is checked when the vehi‐ Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to cle is stationary and displayed via a scale. page 227. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible Safely park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐ operating range, a Check Control message is tion before adding engine oil. displayed. Take care not to add too much engine oil. General information During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ Safety information creased somewhat. WARNING Operating materials, for instance oils, Functional requirements greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful in‐ ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. gredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to ▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral life. Follow the instructions on the containers. position, clutch and accelerator pedals not Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or depressed. eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐ erating materials into different bottles. Store ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐ operating materials out of reach of children.◀ lector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed. NOTE ▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ An engine oil level that is too low causes perature. engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.◀

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 227

Engine oil MOBILITY

NOTE NOTE Too much engine oil can damage the en‐ Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐ gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk damage to property. Do not add too much en‐ of damage to property. When selecting an en‐ gine oil. When too much engine oil is added, gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s correct oil rating.◀ service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop.◀ Suitable engine oil types Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐ Overview ing standards:

The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ Gasoline engine partment, refer to page 223. BMW Longlife-01 FE.

Adding engine oil BMW Longlife-14 FE+. 1. Open the hood, refer to page 223. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise. More information about suitable engine oil rat‐ ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐ quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.

Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐ gine oil with the following oil rating can be added: 3. Add engine oil. Gasoline engine 4. Close the cap. BMW Longlife-01.

API SL, API SM, or API SN. Engine oil types to add Viscosity grades General information Gasoline engine: The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the When selecting an engine oil, make sure that engine. the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. The suitable viscosity Safety information grade is indicated on a label in the engine com‐ NOTE partment. Oil additives can damage the engine. Viscosity class SAE 0W-20 is only suitable for There is a risk of damage to property. Do not particular engines. use oil additives.◀ More information about suitable engine oil rat‐ ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 228

MOBILITY Engine oil

quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine oil change NOTE Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not exceed the service data in‐ dicated in the vehicle.◀ The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 229

Coolant MOBILITY

Coolant

Vehicle features and op‐ Coolant level tions Overview This chapter describes all standard, country- The coolant reservoir is in the engine compart‐ specific and optional features offered with the ment, refer to page 223. series. It also describes features that are not Open the hood, refer to page 223. necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Checking tems. When using these functions and systems, There are yellow Min and Max marks in the the applicable laws and regulations must be coolant reservoir. observed. 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ General information sure to dissipate, then open it. Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐ able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information 3. Open the coolant reservoir lid. WARNING 4. The coolant level is correct if it lies between With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐ the minimum and maximum marks in the tem open, coolant can escape and lead to filler neck. scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀

WARNING Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐ tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐ tives only.◀

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 230

MOBILITY Coolant

Adding 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ sure to dissipate, then open it.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 4. Close the cap. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated as soon as possible.

Disposal Comply with the relevant environmen‐ tal protection regulations when dispos‐ ing of coolant and coolant additives.

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 231

Maintenance MOBILITY

Maintenance

Vehicle features and op‐ General information tions Information on service requirements, refer to page 97, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- play. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Service data in the remote control necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Information on the required maintenance is to the selected options or country versions. This continuously stored in the remote control. The also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ dealer’s service center can read this data out tems. When using these functions and systems, and suggest an optimized maintenance scope the applicable laws and regulations must be for the vehicle. observed. Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently. MINI maintenance system The maintenance system indicates required Storage periods maintenance measures, and thereby provides Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ erational reliability of the vehicle. count. In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or according to the country-specific version. Re‐ another qualified service center or repair shop placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐ cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if rately. Further information is available from a necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐ dealer’s service center or another qualified crofilter/activated-charcoal filter. service center or repair shop. Service and Warranty In‐ Condition Based Service formation Booklet for CBS US models and Warranty

Concept and Service Guide Book‐ Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ let for Canadian models count the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐ uses these to calculate the need for mainte‐ mation Booklet for US models and Warranty nance. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models The system makes it possible to adapt the for additional information on service require‐ amount of maintenance corresponding to your ments. user profile. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 232

MOBILITY Maintenance

dealer’s service center or another qualified Emissions service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐ ▷ The warning light lights up: lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐ tained. Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐ sible. Socket for OBD Onboard ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ Diagnosis cumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐ ing in the engine. Safety information Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ NOTE tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐ The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an ous engine misfiring within a brief period intricate component intended to be used in can seriously damage emission control conjunction with specialized equipment to components, in particular the catalytic con‐ check the vehicle’s primary emissions system. verter. Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐ nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for pur‐ poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐ board Diagnosis.◀

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle's emissions.

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 233

Replacing components MOBILITY

Replacing components

Vehicle features and op‐ Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper with‐ tions out a wiper blade installed.◀

This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTE specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Folded-away wipers can be jammed necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due when the hood is opened. There is a risk of to the selected options or country versions. This damage to property. Make sure that the wipers also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ with the wiper blades mounted are folded tems. When using these functions and systems, down onto the windshield before opening the the applicable laws and regulations must be hood.◀ observed. Front wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the Onboard vehicle tool kit wiper arms. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. 3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the on‐ board vehicle tool kit is located on the right side under the cargo floor panel or in a bag on 4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the holder the right side of the cargo area. on the wiper arm, arrow 1. After use, secure the bag with the onboard ve‐ hicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blade replacement

Safety information NOTE The window may sustain damage if the 5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder of wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade in‐ the wiper arm, arrow 2. stalled. There is a risk of damage to property.

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 234

MOBILITY Replacing components

6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re‐ Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) verse order. Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐ 7. Fold down the wiper arm. odes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐ Rear wiper blade ventional lasers and are officially designated as 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. Class 1 light-emitting diodes. 2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back. Follow the safety information, refer to page 234.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs WARNING Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐ tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have 3. Push the wiper blade out of the fastening cooled off.◀ by continuing to turn it all the way. WARNING 4. Insert the new wiper blade by following the Work on switched-on lighting systems steps in reverse order. The wiper blade can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury must engage audibly. or risk of damage to property. When working 5. Fold down the wiper arm. on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐ turer's instructions.◀ Light/bulb replacement NOTE General information Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not Lights and bulbs hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution bulb by its base.◀ to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that you have appropriate work performed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified WARNING service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐ Too intensive brightness can irritate or liar with it or if it has not been described here. damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of A spare light box is available from a dealer’s injury. Do not look directly into the headlights service center or another qualified service cen‐ or other light sources. Do not remove the LED ter or repair shop. covers.◀ Follow the safety information, refer to page 234.

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 235

Replacing components MOBILITY

Headlight glass Bug light Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐ sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ light glass does not need to be changed. If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance wa‐ ter droplets in the light, have the headlights checked. 1 Parking lights Headlight setting 2 Daytime running lights The headlight adjustments can be affected by 3 Fog lights changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight adjustment was changed, have it checked and, if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service Low beams/high beams center or another qualified service center or re‐ Follow the general instructions on lights and pair shop. bulbs, refer to page 234. Bulbs: H4 Front halogen lights, bulb replacement 1. Open the hood, refer to page 224. Overview 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow, and remove. Halogen headlights

3. Pull off the connector. 1 Low beams/high beams 4. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down. 2 Turn signal

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 236

MOBILITY Replacing components

5. Remove the bulb from the headlight hous‐ 4. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if ing. needed, loosen it with small tilting move‐ 6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in ments if possible. the reverse order.

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 234. Bulbs: PW24W With white turn signal lights: PWY24W 1. Turn the steering wheel. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and 5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture. remove. 6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

Parking lights/fog lights/daytime running lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 234. Bulbs: ▷ Parking lights for halogen headlights: W5W Parking lights for LED headlights: 3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclockwise, W5W NBV. and remove it. ▷ Daytime running light: PSX24W. ▷ Fog light: H8.

Replacing the bulbs 1. Turn the steering wheel. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 2, and remove.

3. Pull off the connector. 4. Remove the bulb holder.

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 237

Replacing components MOBILITY

▷ Parking lights: turn the bulb holder, ar‐ Overview row 1, counterclockwise and remove. ▷ Daytime running lights: squeeze the Position of the headlights upper and lower locks of the bulb holder, arrow 2, and remove the bulb holder. For better accessibility, remove the bulb of the fog light as needed. ▷ Fog lights: turn the bulb holder, ar‐ row 3, counterclockwise and remove.

1 Daytime running lights 2 Low beams/high beams 3 Turn signal

LED bug light

5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture. 6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order. The daytime running lights bulb holder en‐ gages audibly, first below, then above.

LED front lights, bulb replacement 1 Parking lights General information 2 Fog lights The following lights feature LED technology: ▷ Daytime running lights Turn signal ▷ High beams Follow the general instructions on lights and ▷ Low beams bulbs, refer to page 234. ▷ Parking lights Bulbs: PW24W ▷ Fog lights In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop.

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 238

MOBILITY Replacing components

With white turn signal lights: PWY24W Tail lights, bulb replacement 1. Turn the steering wheel. Overview 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove. Vehicles with a rear fog light

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclockwise, 1 Side tail lights and remove it. 2 Rear fog light 3 License plate light 4 Center brake light

Vehicle with two rear fog lights

4. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if needed, loosen it with small tilting move‐ ments if possible.

1 Side tail lights 2 Rear fog lights 3 License plate light 4 Center brake light

5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture. 6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 239

Replacing components MOBILITY

Side tail lights Bulbs: P21W 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Remove left or right cover.

1 Brake lights/tail lights 2 Turn signal

3 Reversing lights 3. Through the opening, loosen the plug con‐ nector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder. Side LED tail lights Press the latches together, arrows 1, and remove the bulb holder.

1 Tail lights 2 Turn signal 4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening. 3 Brake light 5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 4 Reversing lights ▷ Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights. Side tail lights ▷ Arrow 2: turn signal. Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 234.

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 240

MOBILITY Replacing components

▷ Arrow 3: reversing light. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove. The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐ teners. 4. Replace nonworking bulb. Central brake light and license plate 5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse lights order of removal. Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 234. Vehicle with two rear fog lights The lights feature LED technology. In the case Follow the general instructions on lights and of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service cen‐ bulbs, refer to page 234. ter or another qualified service center or repair Bulbs: W16W shop. Left rear fog light: Vehicles with a rear fog light 1. On vehicles with heat shield: Follow the general instructions on lights and Loosen 3 screws, arrow. bulbs, refer to page 234. Bulbs: W16W 1. On vehicles with heat shield: Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

2. Push the heat shield forward and the bumper back in order to be able to reach the fog light. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove. 2. Push the heat shield forward and the bumper back in order to be able to reach the fog light.

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 241

Replacing components MOBILITY

The wire is long enough to guide the socket ▷ With white lens: WY5W. down and through between any heat shield 1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn that may be installed and the bumper. signal lights are on the left and right next to the hinges of the hood.

4. Replace nonworking bulb. 5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse 2. Loosen nuts of the cover by hand and re‐ order of removal. move the cover. Right fog light: 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove. The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

2. Replace nonworking bulb. 3. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement 4. Replace the bulb. Follow the general instructions on lights and 5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse bulbs, refer to page 234. order of removal. Insert the nuts of the Bulbs: cover and press down. ▷ With orange lens: W5W.

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 242

MOBILITY Replacing components

Vehicle battery The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ lowing cases: Maintenance ▷ When making frequent short-distance drives. The battery is maintenance-free. ▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a The added amount of acid is sufficient for the month. service life of the battery. ▷ Steptronic transmission: when parked for More information about the battery can be re‐ long periods of time in selector lever posi‐ quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐ tion D, R or N. other qualified service center or repair shop.

Replacing the vehicle battery Safety information NOTE General information Battery chargers for the vehicle battery The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends can work with high voltages and currents, that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐ which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐ other qualified service center or repair shop work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after risk of damage to property. Only connect bat‐ the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐ tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐ starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐ tures will be available without restriction and ment.◀ any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear. Starting aid terminals Safety information In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 245, in the NOTE engine compartment with the engine off. Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle Power failure functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐ After a power loss, some equipment needs to erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are be newly initialized or individual settings up‐ compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐ dated, for example: stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐ ▷ Time: update. ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s service center.◀ ▷ Date: update. ▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system. Charging the battery Disposing of old batteries General information Have old batteries disposed of by a Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently dealer’s service center or another quali‐ charged to guarantee that the battery remains fied service center or repair shop or usable for its full service life. take them to a collection point. Maintain the battery in an upright position for A discharged battery is indicated by a transport and storage. Secure the battery so red indicator light. that it does not tip over during transport.

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 243

Replacing components MOBILITY

Fuses

Safety information WARNING Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐ stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀

Accessing the fuses The fuses are located in the passenger floor area under the dashboard. 1. To open, loosen screws, arrow 1.

2. Fold down the fuse holder, arrow 2. Proceed in the reverse order to install. Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 244

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and op‐ Roadside Assistance tions The Roadside Assistance phone number can be viewed on the Central Information Display (CID) This chapter describes all standard, country- or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be specific and optional features offered with the established directly. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This Warning triangle also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hazard warning flash‐ ers

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General information Some of the articles have a limited service life. The button is located above the Control Dis‐ play. Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐ ularly and replace any expired items promptly. The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated. Storage The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area. Roadside Assistance Jump-starting General information Roadside Assistance can be reached around the General information clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐ If the battery is discharged, the engine can be tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐ started using the battery of another vehicle and down. two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 245

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

Safety information DANGER Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.◀

WARNING If the jumper cables are connected in the The body ground or a special nut acts as the incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a battery negative terminal. risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order during connection.◀ Connecting the cables NOTE To prevent personal injury or damage to both In the case of body contact between the vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during dure. jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no body contact oc‐ 1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal. curs.◀ 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the Preparation battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance. 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end information can be found on the battery. of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ terminal of the vehicle to be started. cle. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power jumper cable to the negative terminal of consumers in both vehicles. the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle. Starting aid terminals 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐ idle speed. partment acts as the battery's positive terminal. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. started in the usual way.

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 246

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

If the first starting attempt is not successful, Tow truck wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order. Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. Safety information NOTE WARNING The vehicle can become damaged when Due to system limits, individual functions lifting and securing it. can malfunction during tow-starting/towing There is a risk of damage to property. with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐ ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/ fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀ towing.◀

Steptronic transmission with driven Manual transmission front axle: transporting the vehicle Towing or pushing the vehicle General information A broken-down vehicle can be towed or The vehicle must not be towed if the front pushed. wheels are touching the ground. Roll or push, refer to page 83, the vehicle. NOTE Safety information If manual unlocking of the parking brake NOTE is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐ towed. There is a risk of damage to property. ing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a The vehicle should only be transported on a risk of damage to property. Have vehicle trans‐ loading platform.◀ ported only with lifted front axle or on a load‐ Follow the following instructions: ing platform.◀ ▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn Pushing the vehicle signals, and wipers may be unavailable. To remove a broken-down vehicle from the ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle danger area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐ tilted, as the front wheels could turn. tance. ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no Roll or push, refer to page 86, the vehicle. power assist. Consequently, more force

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 247

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

needs to be applied when braking and If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐ steering. tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐ a warning triangle in the rear window. quired. Safety information ▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will WARNING not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ If the approved gross vehicle weight of sponse. the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to ▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will 30 mph/50 km/h. not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ ▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make 30 miles/50 km. sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be Tow truck towed.◀ NOTE With driven front axle If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐ correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐ cur. There is a risk of damage to property. Cor‐ rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.◀

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the following: NOTE ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going The vehicle can become damaged when around corners. lifting and securing it. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it There is a risk of damage to property. is secured with an offset. ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow Tow rope fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀ When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. Towing other vehicles Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking. General information Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐ ing on local regulations.

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 248

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

Tow fitting Screw thread for tow fitting

General information

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ side with respect to the direction of travel. ried in the vehicle. Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or push it out. rear of the vehicle. The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, Tow-starting refer to page 233, are together in the cargo area. Steptronic transmission Use of the tow fitting: Do not tow-start the vehicle. ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to vehicle and screw it all the way in. the Steptronic transmission. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved Have the reasons for the starting difficulties roads only. corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow Manual transmission fitting. If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to Safety information page 244. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐ NOTE alytic converter, only tow-start while the engine is cold. If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the 1. Switch on the hazard warning system and tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ comply with local regulations. erty. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.◀ 2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 69. 3. Engage third gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch pedal again.

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 249

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system. 6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 250

MOBILITY Care

Care

Vehicle features and op‐ ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm. tions This chapter describes all standard, country- Automatic vehicle washes specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Safety information necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due NOTE to the selected options or country versions. This Water can penetrate in the windshield also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ area due to high-pressure washers. There is a tems. When using these functions and systems, risk of damage to property. Avoid high-pres‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be sure washers.◀ observed. NOTE Improper use of automatic vehicle Washing the vehicle washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the fol‐ General information lowing instructions: Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or in the area below the windshield when the those that use soft brushes in order to hood is raised. avoid paint damage. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to age the vehicle. the chassis. ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to Steam jets or high-pressure washers avoid damage to tires and rims.

Safety information ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors. NOTE ▷ Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐ antenna breaking off. ers, components can be damaged due to the ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain pressure or temperatures being too high. There sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐ is a risk of damage to property. Maintain suffi‐ tem.◀ cient distance and do not spray too long con‐ tinuously. Follow the operating instructions for Driving into a vehicle wash with a the high-pressure washer.◀ manual transmission In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able to Distances and temperature roll freely. ▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 83. ▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 251

Care MOBILITY

Driving into a vehicle wash with a products are available from a dealer’s service Steptronic transmission center or another qualified service center or re‐ In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able to pair shop. roll freely. Safety information Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 86. Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in WARNING the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from Cleansers can contain substances that are the outside when in selector lever position N. A dangerous and harmful to your health. There is signal is sounded when an attempt is made to a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, lock the vehicle. open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐ Driving out of a vehicle wash structions on the container.◀ Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. Start the engine, refer to page 70. Vehicle paint

Headlights General information Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use Regular care contributes to driving safety and abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ from insects, with shampoo and wash off with fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ water. quency and extent of your vehicle care to these Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice influences. scraper. Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ After washing the vehicle mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes tered or discolored. briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced. The heat generated during Matte finish braking dries brake discs and brake pads and Only use cleaning and care products suitable protects them against corrosion. for vehicles with matte finish. Completely remove all residues on the win‐ dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to Leather care smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a blade wear. cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased Vehicle care wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. Vehicle care products To guard against discoloration, such as from General information clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months. MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 252

MOBILITY Care

Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Chrome surfaces cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ more visible. tor grille or door handles with an ample supply Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ grease will gradually break down the protective ularly when they have been exposed to road layer of the leather surface. salt.

Upholstery material care Rubber components Environmental influences can cause surface General information soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐ only water and suitable cleaning agents for uum cleaner. cleaning. If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐ Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing Clean the upholstery down to the seams using vehicle care products in order to avoid damage large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐ or noises. terial vigorously. Fine wood parts Safety information Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a NOTE soft cloth. Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a Plastic components risk of damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀ NOTE Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, Caring for special components such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease re‐ movers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. Light-alloy wheels There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral with water.◀ wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam Plastic components are e.g.: jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. turer's instructions. ▷ Roofliner. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents ▷ Light lenses. can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disc. ▷ Instrument cluster cover. After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry ▷ Matt black spray-coated components. them. The heat generated during braking dries ▷ Painted parts in the car's interior. brake discs and brake pads and protects them Clean with a microfiber cloth. against corrosion. Dampen cloth lightly with water. Do not soak the roofliner.

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 253

Care MOBILITY

Safety belts Before using steam cleaners or high pressure cleaners on the vehicle, remove the ball head WARNING and attach the cover to the receptacle. Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety Do not clean the ball head with a steam cleaner belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the or high pressure cleaner. safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for clean‐ Sensor/camera lenses ing the safety belts.◀ To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐ thus have a negative impact on safety. gent. Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Displays/Screens/Projection lenses Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if NOTE they are dry. Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of displays Carpets and floor mats and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ WARNING erty. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber Objects in the driver's floor area can limit cloth.◀ the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. NOTE There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐ The surface of displays can be damaged not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor with improper cleaning. There is a risk of dam‐ mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can age to property. Avoid pressure that is too high be safely attached to the floor. Do not use and do not use any scratching materials.◀ loose floor mats and do not layer several floor Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber are securely fastened again after they were re‐ cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, refer to moved, for instance for cleaning.◀ page 105. Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐ rior for cleaning. Long-term vehicle storage If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a When the vehicle is shut down for longer than microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. three months, special measures must be taken. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and Further information is available from a dealer’s forth in the direction of travel only. service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop. Trailer hitch with removable ball Keep the ball head and receptacle clean. Regularly grease or oil bearings, sliding surfaces and the small balls on the holding pin with resin-free greases or oils.

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17

FIND ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 256

REFERENCE Technical data

Technical data

Vehicle features and op‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This tions also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- tems. When using these functions and systems, specific and optional features offered with the the applicable laws and regulations must be series. It also describes features that are not observed.

General information The technical data and specifications in this the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. service center or another qualified service cen‐ The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, ter or repair shop. for instance due to the selected special equip‐ The information in the vehicle documents al‐ ment, country version or country-specific ways has priority over the information in this measurement method. Detailed values can be Owner's Manual. found in the approval documents, on labels on

Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, model version, equipment or country-specific for instance due to the selected special equip‐ measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for instance a roof antenna,

MINI 3-door Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1,932

Width without mirrors inches/mm 68/1,727

Height inches/mm 55.7/1,414

Length inches/mm 151.1-152.5/3,837-3,874

Wheelbase inches/mm 98.2/2,495

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.5/10.8

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 257

Technical data REFERENCE

MINI 5-door Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1,932

Width without mirrors inches/mm 68/1,727

Height inches/mm 56.1/1,425

Length inches/mm 157.4-158/3,998-4,013

Wheelbase inches/mm 101.1/2,567

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 36.1/11.0

Weights

MINI Cooper, 3-door Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,620/1,642 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,620/1,642

Load Manual transmission lbs/kg 789/358 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 725/329

Approved front axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,940/880 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,006/910

Approved rear axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,733/786 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,684/764

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 132/60

MINI Cooper, 5-door Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,814/1,730 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,814/1,730

257 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 258

REFERENCE Technical data

MINI Cooper, 5-door Load Manual transmission lbs/kg 884/401 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 827/375

Approved front axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,017/915 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,072/940

Approved rear axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,881/853 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,881/853

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

MINI Cooper S, 3-door Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,675/1,667 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,719/1,687

Load Manual transmission lbs/kg 776/352 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 769/349

Approved front axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,026/919 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,066/937

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,691/767

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 132/60

MINI Cooper S, 5-door Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,860/1,751 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,900/1,769

Load lbs/kg 884/401

258 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 259

Technical data REFERENCE

MINI Cooper S, 5-door Approved front axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,086/946 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,125/964

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,881/853

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,719/1,687 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,765/1,708

Load lbs/kg 776/352

Approved front axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,066/937 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,105/955

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,724/782

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 132/60

Capacities

MINI US gal/liters Notes Fuel tank, approx. 11.6/44.0 Fuel quality, refer to page 200.

259 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 260

REFERENCE Appendix

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐ hicle are listed here.

Updates after the edito‐ rial deadline These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual contain updates made after the editorial dead‐ line: ▷ Information: vehicle identification number, refer to page 12.

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 261

Appendix REFERENCE

261 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 262

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z

Index A All-season tires, see Winter AUX-IN port, see Owner's tires 212 Handbook for Navigation, ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ Alternative oil types 227 Entertainment, Communica‐ tem 134 Antifreeze, washer fluid 81 tion 6 Acceleration Assistant, see Antilock Brake System, Average fuel consump‐ Launch Control 89 ABS 134 tion 101 Accessories and parts 8 Anti-slip control, see DSC 134 Average speed 101 ACC, see Camera-based cruise Anti-theft protection, lug Axle loads, weights 257 control 139 bolts 219 Activated-charcoal filter 163 App, MINI Motorer’s Guide 33 B Activation times, parked-car Approach control warning ventilation 164 with city light braking func‐ Backrest curvature, see Lum‐ Active Cruise Control, see tion 126 bar support 56 Camera-based cruise con‐ Approved axle load 257 Backrest, seats 55 trol 139 Apps, see Owner's Handbook Band-aids, see First-aid Adaptive brake lights, see for Navigation, Entertain‐ kit 244 Brake force display 132 ment, Communication 6 Battery replacement, vehicle Additives, oil 227 Arrival time 102 battery 242 Adjustments, steering Ash tray 169 Battery, vehicle 242 wheel 63 Assistance when driving Being towed, see Tow-starting After washing vehicle 251 off 137 and towing 246 Airbags 115 AUTO intensity 161 Belts, safety belts 57 Airbags, indicator and warning Automatic climate con‐ Beverage holder, cup light 117 trol 160 holder 173 Air circulation, see Recircu‐ Automatic Curb Monitor 62 Blocking, power window 52 lated-air mode 158, 162 Automatic deactivation, front- Bonus range, GREEN Air conditioner 157 seat passenger airbags 117 Mode 191 Air conditioning 158, 161 Automatic headlight con‐ Bottle holder, see Cup Air, dehumidifying, see Air trol 110 holder 173 conditioning 158, 161 Automatic locking 48 Brake assistant 134 Air distribution, Automatic transmission with Brake discs, break-in 184 manual 159, 162 Steptronic 83 Brake force display 132 Air flow, air conditioner 158 Automatic vehicle wash 250 Brake lights, brake force dis‐ Air flow, automatic climate AUTO program, automatic cli‐ play 132 control 162 mate control 161 Brake pads, break-in 184 Air pressure, tires 202 AUTO program, intensity 161 Braking, information 186 Air vents, see Ventilation 163 Auto Start/Stop function 71 Breakdown assistance 244 Alarm system 49 Auto washing 250 Breakdown assistance, Road‐ Alarm triggering 49 AUX-IN port, position in vehi‐ side Assistance 244 Alarm, unintentional 50 cle 170 Break-in 184 Alertness assistant 132

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 263

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Brightness of Control Dis‐ Carpet, care 253 Coasting 193 play 104 Catalytic converter, see Hot Coasting with engine decou‐ Bug light 235 exhaust gas system 185 pled, coasting 193 Bulb replacement 234 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Coasting with idling en‐ Bulb replacement, ice 231 gine 193 front 235, 237 CD, see Owner's Handbook Combination switch, see Turn Bulb replacement, rear 238 for Navigation, Entertain‐ signals 74 Bulb replacement, side 241 ment, Communication 6 Combi switch, see Wiper sys‐ Bulbs and lights 234 Center armrest 173 tem 75, 78 Button, Start/Stop 69 Center console 18 Comfort Access 43 Bypassing, see Jump-start‐ Central Information Display Comfort entry 39 ing 244 (CID) 20 Compartments in the Central Information Display doors 173 C (CID) operating concept 20 Compass 167 Central instrument cluster, Compressor 213 Calendar, see Owner's Hand‐ LED ring 105 Computer, see Onboard Com‐ book for Navigation, Enter‐ Central locking system, un‐ puter 100 tainment, Communication 6 locking, from inside 42 Condensation on win‐ California Proposition 65 Central screen, see Control dows 162 Warning 8 Display 20 Condensation under the vehi‐ Camera-based assistance sys‐ Changes, technical, see For cle 187 tems, see Intelligent Your Own Safety 8 Condition Based Service Safety 125 Changing parts 233 CBS 231 Camera-based cruise con‐ Changing wheels 218 Configuring driving pro‐ trol 139 Changing wheels/tires 211 gram 137 Camera lenses, care 253 Chassis number, see Vehicle Confirmation signal 49 Camera, rearview cam‐ identification number 12 Contacts, see Owner's Hand‐ era 150 Check Control 92 book for Navigation, Enter‐ Can holder, see Cup Checking the oil level elec‐ tainment, Communication 6 holder 173 tronically 225 Continued driving with a flat Care, displays 253 Children, seating position 64 tire 121, 125 Care, vehicle 251 Children, transporting Control Display 20 Care, washing the vehicle 250 safely 64 Control Display, settings 104 Cargo area 175 Child restraint system 64 Controller 21 Cargo area, adapting size 179 Child restraint system Control systems, driving stabil‐ Cargo area, enlarging 177 LATCH 66 ity 134 Cargo area lid 45 Child restraint systems, Convenient closing 39 Cargo area, loading 176 mounting 65 Convenient opening 39 Cargo area, storage compart‐ Child safety locks 68 Coolant 229 ments 177 Child seat, mounting 65 Cooling, maximum 161 Cargo cover 176 Child seats 64 Cooling system 229 Cargo position, rear seat back‐ Chrome parts, care 252 Cornering light 111 rest 177 Cigarette lighter 169 Corrosion on brake discs 186 Cargo, stowing and secur‐ Cleaning, displays 253 Cosmetic mirror 169 ing 176 Climate control 157, 160 Courtesy lights during unlock‐ Cargo straps 176 Clothes hooks 174 ing 39

263 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 264

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Courtesy lights with the vehi‐ Display lighting, see Instru‐ E cle locked 39 ment lighting 113 Cruise control 144 Displays 91 Electronic displays, instrument Cruise control, active 139 Displays, care 253 cluster 92 Cruise control with distance Disposal, coolant 230 Electronic oil measure‐ control, see Camera-based Disposal, vehicle battery 242 ment 225 cruise control 139 Distance control, see PDC 146 Electronic Stability Program Cruise control without dis‐ Distance to destination 102 ESP, see DSC 134 tance control, see Cruise Divided screen view, split E-mail, see Owner's Hand‐ control 144 screen 25 book for Navigation, Enter‐ Cruising range 97 Drive-off assistant 137 tainment, Communication 6 Cup holder 173 Drive-off assistant, see Emergency release, fuel filler Current fuel consumption 97 DSC 134 flap 199 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ Emergency service, see Road‐ D gent Safety 125 side Assistance 244 Driving Dynamics Control, see Emergency unlocking, trans‐ Damage, tires 210 MINI Driving Modes mission lock 89 Damping control, dy‐ switch 136 Emergency wheel, compact namic 136 Driving Excitement, wheel, see Emergency Data memory 9 SPORT 102 wheel 221 Data, technical 256, 259 Driving instructions, break- Energy Control 97 Date 104 in 184 Engine, automatic Start/Stop Date display 97 Driving mode, GREEN 190 function 71 Daytime running lights 111 Driving modes 136 Engine, automatic switch- DCC, see Cruise control 144 Driving notes, general 185 off 71 Defrosting, see Defrosting the Driving on racetracks 188 Engine compartment 223 windows 159 Driving stability control sys‐ Engine compartment, working Defrosting, see Windows, de‐ tems 134 in 223 frosting 162 Driving style analysis 194 Engine coolant 229 Defrosting the windows 159 Driving tip, GREEN tip 192 Engine idling when driving, Dehumidifying, air 158, 161 Driving tips 185 coasting 193 Deleting personal data 26 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Engine oil 225 Deletion of personal data 26 trol 134 Engine oil, adding 226 Destination distance 102 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Engine oil additives 227 Digital clock 96 trol 135 Engine oil change 228 Digital compass 167 DVD, Video, see Owner's Engine oil filler neck 226 Dimensions 256 Handbook for Navigation, Engine oil types, alterna‐ Dimmable exterior mirrors 62 Entertainment, Communica‐ tive 227 Dimmable interior mirror 63 tion 6 Engine oil types, suitable 227 Direction indicator, see Turn Dynamic Damping Con‐ Engine start, jump-start‐ signals 74 trol 136 ing 244 Display, electronic, instrument Dynamic Stability Control Engine start, see Starting the cluster 92 DSC 134 engine 70 Display, engine tempera‐ Dynamic Traction Control Engine stop 71 ture 102 DTC 135 Engine temperature, dis‐ Display, GREEN Mode 190 play 102

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 265

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Entering a destination, see Entertainment, Communica‐ Gear shift indicator 98 Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ tion 6 General driving notes 185 gation, Entertainment, Com‐ Fine wood, care 252 Glare shield 169 munication 6 First-aid kit 244 Glass sunroof, initialize the Entering an address, naviga‐ Flat tire, changing wheels 218 system 54 tion, see Owner's Manual for Flat Tire Monitor FTM 123 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic Navigation, Entertainment Flat tire, repairing 213 glass sunroof 52 and Communication 6 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor Glove compartment 172 Entering a vehicle wash 250 TPM 118 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Equipment, interior 165 Flat tire, warning Handbook for Navigation, Error displays, see Check Con‐ light 120, 124 Entertainment, Communica‐ trol 92 Flooding 185 tion 6 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ Floor carpet, care 253 GREEN bonus range 191 gram, see DSC 134 Floor mats, care 253 GREEN Mode 190 Exchanging wheels/tires 211 Fogged up windows 159 GREEN Mode driving style Exhaust gas system 185 Fold-away position, wind‐ analysis 194 Exiting a vehicle wash 250 shield wipers 77, 80 GREEN - program, driving dy‐ Exterior mirror, automatic Fold back rear seat back‐ namics 136 dimming feature 62 rests 177 GREEN tip, driving tip 192 Exterior mirrors 61 Foot brake 186 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ Exterior mirrors, Automatic For Your Own Safety 8 proved 257 Curb Monitor 62 Front airbags 115 Ground clearance 187 Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐ Front fog lights 112 tion 62 Front-seat passenger airbags, H External start 244 automatic deactivation 117 External temperature dis‐ Front-seat passenger airbags, Halogen headlights 235 play 96 indicator light 118 Handbrake, see Parking External temperature warn‐ Front seats 55 brake 74 ing 96 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 123 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ Eyes for securing cargo 176 Fuel 200 nating code 166 Fuel cap 198 Hands-free kit, see Owner's F Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ Handbook for Navigation, age fuel consumption 101 Entertainment, Communica‐ Failure message, see Check Fuel filler flap 198 tion 6 Control 92 Fuel gauge 96 Hazard warning flashers 244 False alarm, see Unintentional Fuel quality 200 Head airbag 115 alarm 50 Fuel recommendation 200 Headlight control, auto‐ Fan, see Air flow 158, 162 Fuel, tank capacity 259 matic 110 Fastening safety belts, see Fuse 243 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ Safety belts 57 ture 110 Filler neck for engine oil 226 G Headlight flasher 75 Finding charging stations, see Headlight glass 235 Charging stations and points Garage door opener, see Headlights, care 251 of interest, see Owner's Integrated Universal Remote Head restraints, front 59 Handbook for Navigation, Control 165 Head restraints, rear 60 Gasoline 200 Head-up Display 105

265 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 266

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Head-up Display, shift point Individual settings, see Per‐ In the vicinity of the roof‐ indicator 107 sonal Profile 46 liner 19 Head-up Display, sport dis‐ Inductive charging, see Wire‐ In the vicinity of the steering plays 107 less charging, see Owner's wheel 16 Head-up Display, standard Handbook for Navigation, view 106 Entertainment, Communica‐ J Heavy cargo, stowing tion 6 cargo 176 Inflation pressure, tires 202 Jacking points for the vehicle High-beam Assistant 111 Inflation pressure warning, jack 220 High beams 75 tires 123 Jam protection system, glass High beams/low beams, see Info Display, see Onboard sunroof 54 High-beam Assistant 111 Computer 100 Jam protection system, win‐ Hills 186 Information 6 dows 51 Hill start assistant, see Drive- Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Jump-starting 244 off assistant 137 tor TPM 119 Holder for beverages 173 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor K Homepage 6 FTM 123 Hood 223 Instrument cluster 91 Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ Horn 16 Instrument cluster, electronic cess 43 Hot exhaust gas system 185 displays 92 Key Memory, see Personal Hotline, see Owner's Hand‐ Instrument lighting 113 Profile 46 book for Navigation, Enter‐ Integrated key 42 Key, see Integrated key 42 tainment, Communication 6 Integrated Owner's Manual in Key, see Remote control 38 HUD Head-up Display 105 the vehicle 31 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ Hydroplaning 185 Intelligent Safety 125 mission 86 Intended use 8 Knee airbag 116 I Intensity, AUTO program 161 Interior equipment 165 L Ice warning, see External tem‐ Interior lights 113 perature warning 96 Interior lights during unlock‐ Label on recommended Icy roads, see External tem‐ ing 39 tires 212 perature warning 96 Interior lights with the vehicle Label, runflat tires 213 Identification marks, tires 208 locked 39 Language on Control Dis‐ Identification number, see Ve‐ Interior mirror 61 play 104 hicle identification num‐ Interior mirror, automatic Lashing eyes 176 ber 12 dimming feature 63 LATCH child restraint fixing Ignition off 69 Interior mirror, compass 167 system 66 Ignition on 69 Interior mirror, manually dim‐ Launch Control 89 Illuminated ring, central in‐ mable 62 Leather, care 251 strument cluster 105 Interior motion sensor 50 LED ring, central instrument Indication of a flat Internet site 6 cluster 105 tire 120, 124 Interval display, service re‐ LEDs, light-emitting di‐ Indicator light, see Check Con‐ quirements 97 odes 234 trol 92 Interval mode 76, 79 Letters and numbers, enter‐ Individual air distribu‐ In the vicinity of the center ing 27 tion 159, 162 console 18 Light 109

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 267

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Light-alloy wheels, care 252 Manual operation, fuel filler Mobility System 213 Light-emitting diodes, flap 199 Modifications, technical, see LEDs 234 Manual operation, PDC Park For Your Own Safety 8 Lighter 169 Distance Control 148 Moisture in headlight 235 Lighting 109 Manual operation, rearview Monitor, see Control Dis‐ Light replacement 234 camera 150 play 20 Light replacement, Manual transmission 82 Motorer’s Guide app, see MINI front 235, 237 Manufacturer of the MINI 8 Motorer’s Guide app 33 Light replacement, rear 238 Map update, see Owner's Mounting of child restraint Light replacement, side 241 Handbook for Navigation, systems 65 Lights and bulbs 234 Entertainment, Communica‐ MP3 player, see Audio, see Light switch 109 tion 6 Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Load 176 Matte finish 251 gation, Entertainment, Com‐ Loading 175 Maximum cooling 161 munication 6 Loading position 177 Maximum speed, display 98 Multifunction steering wheel, Locking, automatic 48 Maximum speed, winter buttons 16 Locking, from inside 42 tires 212 Multimedia, see Owner's Locking, settings 48 Measurement, units of 104 Manual for Navigation, En‐ Low beams 109 Mechanical key 42 tertainment and Communi‐ Low beams, automatic, see Medical kit 244 cation 6 High-beam Assistant 111 Menu in instrument clus‐ Music hard disk, see Owner's Lower back support, mechani‐ ter 100 Handbook for Navigation, cal 56 Menus, see Central Informa‐ Entertainment, Communica‐ Lug bolt lock 219 tion Display (CID) operating tion 6 Luggage rack, see Roof- concept 22 mounted luggage rack 187 Messages, see Check Con‐ N Lumbar support, mechani‐ trol 92 cal 56 Microfilter 159, 163 Navigation, see Owner's MID - program, driving dy‐ Manual for Navigation, En‐ M namics 136 tertainment and Communi‐ MINI Connected, see Owner's cation 6 Maintenance 231 Handbook for Navigation, Neck restraints, front, see Maintenance require‐ Entertainment, Communica‐ Head restraints 59 ments 231 tion 6 Neck restraints, rear, see Maintenance, service require‐ MINI driving modes 136 Head restraints 60 ments 97 MINI logo projection during Neutral cleaner, see Wheel Maintenance system, unlocking 39 cleaner 252 MINI 231 MINI maintenance sys‐ New wheels and tires 211 Make-up mirror 169 tem 231 Notes, see Owner's Handbook Malfunction displays, see MINIMALISM Analyser 194 for Navigation, Entertain‐ Check Control 92 MINIMALISM information 192 ment, Communication 6 Manual air distribu‐ MINI Motorer’s Guide app 33 tion 159, 162 Minimum tread, tires 210 O Manual air flow 158, 162 Mirrors 61 Manual mode, transmis‐ Mobile communication devi‐ OBD Onboard Diagnos‐ sion 87 ces in the vehicle 185 tics 232

267 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 268

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Obstacle marking, rearview Parked vehicle, condensa‐ Radio, see Owner's Manual for camera 151 tion 187 Navigation, Entertainment Octane rating, see Recom‐ Parking aid, see PDC 146 and Communication 6 mended fuel grade 201 Parking assistant 152 Rain sensor 76, 79 Odometer 96 Parking brake 74 Ratchet straps 176 Office, see Owner's Manual Parking lights 109 Rear fog light 112 for Navigation, Entertain‐ Parts and accessories 8 Rear lights 238 ment and Communication 6 Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐ Rear luggage rack 187 Oil 225 ing 62 Rearview camera 149 Oil, adding 226 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ Rear window de‐ Oil additives 227 era 151 froster 159, 163 Oil change 228 PDC Park Distance Con‐ Recirculated-air filter 163 Oil change interval, service re‐ trol 146 Recirculated-air quirements 97 Performance Control 136 mode 158, 162 Oil filler neck 226 Personal Profile 46 Recommended fuel Oil types, alternative 227 Person warning with City light grade 201 Oil types, suitable 227 braking function 129 Recommended tire Old batteries, disposal 242 Plastic, care 252 brands 212 Onboard Computer 100 PostCrash — iBrake 133 Refueling 198 Onboard Diagnostics Power failure 242 Remaining range 97 OBD 232 Power windows 50 Remote control, additional 41 Onboard literature, Prescribed engine oil Remote control, loss 41 printed 31 types 227 Remote control, malfunc‐ Onboard vehicle tool kit 233 Pressure, tires 202 tion 41 On-call service, see Roadside Pressure warning, tires 123 Remote control, opening/clos‐ Assistance 244 Printed onboard literature 31 ing 38 Online Owner's Manual 33 Profile, see Personal Pro‐ Remote control, replacing the Opening and closing 38 file 46 battery 40 Opening, from inside 42 Programmable memory but‐ Remote control, univer‐ Operating menus, Central In‐ tons, Central Information sal 165 formation Display (CID) 20 Display (CID) 26 Replacing parts 233 Optional equipment 7 Protective function, glass sun‐ Replacing the battery, remote Owner's Manual media 31 roof 54 control 40 Owner's Manual, printed 31 Protective function, win‐ Replacing wheels/tires 211 dows 51 Reporting safety malfunc‐ P Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐ tions 13 troller 21 RES CNCL button, see Camera- Paint, vehicle 251 based cruise control 139 Panic alarm, see Panic R RES CNCL button, see Cruise mode 49 control 144 Panic mode 49 Racetrack operation 188 Reserve warning, see Panoramic glass sunroof 52 Radiator fluid 229 Range 97 Parallel parking assistant 152 Radio-operated remote con‐ Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Park Distance Control trol, opening/closing 38 TPM 119 PDC 146 Radio-ready state 70 Retreaded tires 212 Parked-car ventilation 163 Roadside Assistance 244

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 269

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Roadside parking lights 110 Service requirements, dis‐ Sport displays, Head-up Dis‐ Rolling code hand-held trans‐ play 97 play 107 mitter 166 Servotronic 138 SPORT program, driving dy‐ RON recommended fuel SET button, see Camera-based namics 137 grade 201 cruise control 139 Sport program, transmis‐ Roofliner 19 SET button, see Cruise con‐ sion 86 Roof load capacity 257 trol 144 Stability control systems 134 Roof-mounted luggage Settings, locking/unlocking 48 Standard equipment 7 rack 187 Settings, mirrors 61 Standard view, Head-up Dis‐ Route, navigation, see Own‐ Settings on Control Dis‐ play 106 er's Handbook for Naviga‐ play 104 Start/stop, automatic func‐ tion, Entertainment, Com‐ Shift gate rotary switch 136 tion 71 munication 6 Shift paddles on the steering Start/Stop button 69 RSC Runflat System Compo‐ wheel 88 Starting the engine 70 nent, see Runflat tires 213 Shift point indicator, Head-up Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Rubber components, Display 107 Handbook for Navigation, care 252 Side airbag 115 Entertainment, Communica‐ Runflat tires 213 Signaling, horn 16 tion 6 Signals when unlocking 49 Status control display, S Sitting safely 55 tires 119 Size 256 Status information, Central In‐ Safe braking 186 Slide/tilt glass roof 52 formation Display (CID) 25 Safety belt reminder for driv‐ SMS, see Short messages, see Status of Owner's Manual 7 er's seat and front passenger Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Steering assistance 138 seat 59 gation, Entertainment, Com‐ Steering wheel, adjusting 63 Safety belts 57 munication 6 Steptronic Sport transmission, Safety belts, care 253 SMS text messages, supple‐ see Steptronic transmis‐ Safety locks, doors, and win‐ mentary 95 sion 83 dows 68 Snow chains 217 Steptronic Sport transmission Safety switch, windows 52 Socket 169 with double clutch, see Step‐ Safety systems, airbags 115 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ tronic transmission 83 Saving fuel 189 nostics 232 Steptronic transmission 83 Screen, see Control Display 20 Sound output, see Owner's Steptronic transmission with Screwdriver 233 Handbook for Navigation, double clutch, see Steptronic Sealant 213 Entertainment, Communica‐ transmission 83 Seat heating, front 57 tion 6 Stopping the engine 71 Seating position for chil‐ Spare tire, see Emergency Storage compartments 172 dren 64 wheel 221 Storage, tires 212 Seats, front 55 Speed, average 101 Storing the vehicle 253 Securing cargo 176 Speed Limit Info 98 Stowing and securing Selection list in instrument Speed Limit Info, Onboard cargo 176 cluster 100 Computer 102 Summer tires, tread 210 Sensors, care 253 Speed limits, display 98 Sun visor 169 Service and warranty 9 Speed warning 103 Supplementary Owner's Man‐ Service requirements, Condi‐ Split screen 25 uals 31 tion Based Service CBS 231 Sport displays 102

269 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 270

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Supplementary SMS text mes‐ Tire pressure 202 Trip recorder, see Trip odome‐ sages 95 Tire Pressure Monitor ter 96 Switch for driving dynam‐ TPM 118 Turning radius lines, rearview ics 136 Tire repair kit, see Mobility camera 151 Switch, see Cockpit 16 System 213 Turn signal, front 235, 237 Symbols 7 Tires, changing 211 Turn signal, side 241 Symbols in the status field 25 Tire sealant, see Mobility Sys‐ Turn signals, operation 74 tem 213 Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ T Tires, everything on wheels placement 238 and tires 202 Tachometer 96 Tires, runflat 213 U Tailgate 45 Tire tread 210 Tailgate via remote control 40 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Unintentional alarm 50 Tail lights 238 Navigation, Entertainment Units of measurement 104 Technical changes, see For and Communication 6 Universal remote control 165 Your Own Safety 8 Tools 233 Unlocking, settings 48 Technical data 256, 259 Total vehicle weight 257 Updates made after the edito‐ Telephone, see Owner's Touchpad 23 rial deadline 7 Manual for Navigation, En‐ Towing 246 Upholstery care 252 tertainment and Communi‐ Tow-starting 246 USB interface, position in vehi‐ cation 6 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ cle 170 Teleservices, see Owner's tor 118 USB port, see USB inter‐ Handbook for Navigation, Traction control 135 face 170 Entertainment, Communica‐ TRACTION driving mode, driv‐ Use, intended 8 tion 6 ing dynamics 135 Temperature, air condi‐ Traffic bulletins, see Owner's V tioner 158 Handbook for Navigation, Temperature, automatic cli‐ Entertainment, Communica‐ Vanity mirror 169 mate control 160 tion 6 Vehicle battery 242 Temperature display for exter‐ Trailer hitch, care 253 Vehicle battery, replacing 242 nal temperature 96 Transmission lock, electronic Vehicle, break-in 184 Temperature, engine 102 unlocking 89 Vehicle care 251 Terminal, starting aid 245 Transmission lock, releasing Vehicle care products 251 Theft alarm system, see Alarm manually 88 Vehicle features and op‐ system 49 Transmission, manual trans‐ tions 7 Thigh support 56 mission 82 Vehicle identification num‐ Tilt alarm sensor 50 Transmission, see Steptronic ber 12 Tilting, passenger's side mir‐ transmission 83 Vehicle jack 220 ror 62 Transporting children Vehicle paint 251 Time 104 safely 64 Vehicle storage 253 Time of arrival 102 Tread, tires 210 Vehicle wash 250 Tire damage 210 Trip computer 102 Vehicle, washing 250 Tire identification marks 208 Triple turn signal activa‐ Ventilation 163 Tire inflation pressure 202 tion 74 Ventilation, see Parked-car Tire inflation pressure moni‐ Trip odometer 96 ventilation 163 tor, see FTM 123

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17 Seite 271

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

VIN, see Vehicle identification Windshield wipers, fold-away number 12 position 77, 80 Voice activation system 28 Windshield wipers, see Wiper Voice command response, see system 75, 78 Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Winter storage, care 253 gation, Entertainment, Com‐ Winter tires, suitable tires 212 munication 6 Winter tires, tread 210 Wiper blades, replacing 233 W Wiper fluid 81 Wiper system 75, 78 Warning and indicator lights, Wireless charging dock, see see Check Control 92 Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Warning displays, see Check gation, Entertainment, Com‐ Control 92 munication 6 Warning messages, see Check Wireless charging, see Wire‐ Control 92 less charging, see Owner's Warning triangle 244 Handbook for Navigation, Warranty 8 Entertainment, Communica‐ Washer fluid 81 tion 6 Washer nozzles, wind‐ Wood, care 252 shield 77, 80 Word match concept, naviga‐ Washing the vehicle 250 tion 27 Water on roads 185 Wrench 233 Weights 257 Welcome lights 110 Welcome lights during unlock‐ ing 39 Wheel cleaner 252 Wheels, changing 211 Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 202 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 123 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 118 Window defroster, rear 159, 163 Windows, powered 50 Windshield cleaning sys‐ tem 75, 78 Windshield de‐ froster 159, 163 Windshield washer fluid 81 Windshield washer noz‐ zles 77, 80

271 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17

*BL298333600I* 01402983336 ue 01402983336

DRIVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17